WO2017205699A1 - Tête de club à poids réglable - Google Patents

Tête de club à poids réglable Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017205699A1
WO2017205699A1 PCT/US2017/034586 US2017034586W WO2017205699A1 WO 2017205699 A1 WO2017205699 A1 WO 2017205699A1 US 2017034586 W US2017034586 W US 2017034586W WO 2017205699 A1 WO2017205699 A1 WO 2017205699A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
club head
weight
weights
protruding
adjustable weighting
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2017/034586
Other languages
English (en)
Inventor
Martin R. Jertson
Ryan M. Stokke
Xiaojian Chen
Cory S. Bacon
Jeremy POPE
Daniel K. Lee
David A. Higdon
Eric J. Morales
Original Assignee
Karsten Manufacturing Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Karsten Manufacturing Corporation filed Critical Karsten Manufacturing Corporation
Priority to GB1818828.4A priority Critical patent/GB2565690B/en
Publication of WO2017205699A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017205699A1/fr
Priority to US16/185,923 priority patent/US10556161B2/en
Priority to US16/721,630 priority patent/US10864416B2/en
Priority to US16/952,403 priority patent/US11291892B2/en
Priority to US17/692,497 priority patent/US11918871B2/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B53/00—Golf clubs
    • A63B53/04—Heads
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B53/00—Golf clubs
    • A63B53/04—Heads
    • A63B53/0408—Heads characterised by specific dimensions, e.g. thickness
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B53/00—Golf clubs
    • A63B53/04—Heads
    • A63B53/0433—Heads with special sole configurations
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B53/00—Golf clubs
    • A63B53/04—Heads
    • A63B53/045—Strengthening ribs
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B53/00—Golf clubs
    • A63B53/04—Heads
    • A63B53/0466—Heads wood-type
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B60/00—Details or accessories of golf clubs, bats, rackets or the like
    • A63B60/02—Ballast means for adjusting the centre of mass
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B60/00—Details or accessories of golf clubs, bats, rackets or the like
    • A63B60/52—Details or accessories of golf clubs, bats, rackets or the like with slits
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B53/00—Golf clubs
    • A63B53/04—Heads
    • A63B2053/0491—Heads with added weights, e.g. changeable, replaceable

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a golf club head, and more specifically to a golf club head having an adjustable weighting system.
  • Various characteristics of a golf club can affect the performance of the golf club.
  • the center of gravity and the moment of inertia of the golf club head are characteristics that can affect performance.
  • the center of gravity and moment of inertia of the golf club head are functions of the distribution of mass of the golf club head.
  • distributing mass of the club head to be closer to a sole portion of the club head, closer to a strike face of the club head, and/or closer to a toe portion and heel portion of the club head can alter the center of gravity and/or the moment of inertia of the club head.
  • Altering the moment of inertia of the club head can in turn alter the forgiveness of the golf club, flight direction of the golf ball, and/or flight angle of the golf ball.
  • FIGS. 1-3 are perspective, front, and top views, respectively, of a golf club head having an x-axis, a y-axis, and a z-axis according to one embodiment.
  • FIGS. 4 and 5 are bottom and partial perspective views, respectively, of the golf club head of FIG. 1.
  • FIGS. 6 and 7 are bottom and partial perspective views, respectively, of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 8-10 are bottom, cross-sectional, and partial perspective views, respectively, of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 11-13 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 14 and 15 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 16 and 17 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 19 and 20 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 21 and 22 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 23 and 24 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 25 and 26 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 27 and 28 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 29 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 30 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 33 and 34 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 35 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 36 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 37 and 38 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 39 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 40 and 41 are bottom and rear views of a gold club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 42 is a perspective view of an alternative protruding body for the golf club head of FIGS. 40 and 41.
  • FIG. 43 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 44 is a perspective view of an alternative protruding body for the golf club head of FIG. 43.
  • FIG. 45 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 46 and 47 are perspective views of an alternative protruding body for the golf club head of FIG. 45.
  • FIGS. 48-50 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 51 and 52 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 53 and 54 are perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 55-58 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 59-62 are illustrations of various shapes and sizes for protruding bodies.
  • FIGS. 63-66 are illustrations of various types of structures that may be used on weights to attach to protruding bodies.
  • FIG. 67 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 68 is a rear view of the golf club head of FIG. 67.
  • FIG. 69 is an illustration of an adjustable weighting system of the golf club head of FIG. 67.
  • FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view of the adjustable weighting system of FIG. 69.
  • FIG. 71 is a perspective view of an adjustable weight of the golf club head of FIG. 67 in one configuration.
  • FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the adjustable weight of the golf club head of FIG. 67 in another configuration.
  • FIG. 73 is a perspective view of an adjustable weight of the golf club head of FIG. 67 according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 74 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 74A is a perspective view of a tensioner mechanism for the golf club head of FIG. 74.
  • FIGS. 75-77 are perspective views of alternate golf club heads having adjustable weighting systems.
  • FIGS. 78-81 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 82 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 83 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 84 and 85 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 86 and 87 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 88 and 89 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 90-98 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 99 and 100 are perspective views of golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 101 and 101 A are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 102 and 103 are perspective views of an adjustable weight according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 104 and 105 are perspective views of a golf club head and adjustable weight according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 106-108 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 109 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 110 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. I l l and 112 are perspective views of a golf club head and turnbuckle according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 113-116 are perspective views of a golf club head and adjustable weight according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 117-125 are perspective views of a golf club head and adjustable weights according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 126 and 127 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 128 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 129-134 are perspective views of a golf club head and sole plates according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 135 and 136 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment
  • FIG. 137 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 138-141 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 142 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 143 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 144 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 145 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 146 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 147 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 148, 149, and 151 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 150 and 152 are partial perspective views of the club head of FIGS. 148, 149, and 151.
  • FIGS. 153-156 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 157-159 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 160 and 160 A are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 161 is a perspective view of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIGS. 162 and 163 are perspective views of a golf club head according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 164 is a side cross sectional view of the golf club head of FIGs. 1-3.
  • FIG. 165 is a bottom view of the golf club head of FIGs. 1-3. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • the adjustable weighting systems include a plurality of discrete attachment locations capable of receiving one or more weights. Each weight can be coupled to and shifted between any of the discrete attachment locations on the club head. Accordingly, the adjustable weighting system provides user adjustability of club head weighting and center of gravity position to change ball flight (i.e. ball spin or trajectory).
  • the adjustable weighting systems described herein protrude from the external contour of the club head, or are minimally insert from the external contour of the club head. Further, in many embodiments the adjustable weighting systems described herein are positioned near the perimeter of the club head. The positioning of the adjustable weighting systems maximizes perimeter weighting and low and back weight positioning, thereby maximizing club head moment of inertia for forgiveness on off-center hits and positioning the club head center of gravity low and back to increase launch angle and reduce backspin. Accordingly, the golf club heads described herein provide user adjustability of club head center of gravity to adjust ball flight, while maintaining optimal design and performance characteristics (high moment of inertia and low and back center of gravity position).
  • adjustable weighting systems having one or more platforms, ledges, recesses or channels, without requiring significant internal structures that would adversely affect moment of inertia and head center of gravity position.
  • Couple should be broadly understood and refer to connecting two or more elements, mechanically or otherwise. Coupling (whether mechanical or otherwise) may be for any length of time, e.g., permanent or semi-permanent or only for an instant.
  • golf club heads 100 110, 210, 310, 410, 510, 610, 710, 810, 910, 1010, 1110, 1210, 1310, 1410, 1510, 1610, 1710, 1810, 1910, 2010, 2110, 2210, 2310, 2410, 2510, 2610, 2710, 3010, 3210, 3310, 3410, 3510, 3610, 3710, 3810, 3910, 4010, 4110, 4210, 4310, 4410, 4510, 4610, 4710, 4810, 4910, 5010, 5110, 5210, 5310, 5410, 5510, 5610, 5710, 5810, 5910, 6010, 6110, 6210, 6310, 6410, 6510, 6610, and 6710 as woods.
  • the woods are provided for purposes of illustration of one or more embodiments of the adjustable weighting systems as disclosed herein.
  • the disclosed embodiments of the adjustable weighting systems can be used on any desired wood, iron, hybrid, or other golf club where adjustable weighting is desired.
  • the club head may include, but is not limited to, a driver, a fairway wood, a hybrid, a one-iron, a two-iron, a three-iron, a four- iron, a five-iron, a six-iron, a seven-iron, an eight-iron, a nine-iron, a pitching wedge, a gap wedge, a utility wedge, a sand wedge, a lob wedge, and/or a putter.
  • FIGS. 1-3 illustrate a golf club head 100.
  • the golf club head 100 includes a body 14 having a toe or toe end 18 opposite a heel or heel end 22.
  • the body 14 also includes a crown or top 26 opposite a sole or bottom 30 and a back or rear or back end 34 opposite a club face or face or strike face or strike plate 38.
  • the club head further includes a perimeter or skirt or trailing edge 24 located at a junction or intersection between the crown 26 and the sole 30 extending from near the heel 22 to near the toe 18.
  • the club head 100 further includes an adjustable weighting system. At least a portion of the adjustable weighting system can be positioned on the sole 30, the skirt 24, the heel 22, the toe 18, or any combination of the described locations.
  • the golf club head 100 also includes a hosel 42 having a hosel axis 46 (shown in FIG. 2) that extends through the center of the hosel 42.
  • the hosel 42 is configured to receive a golf club shaft (not shown) that carries a grip (not shown). A golfer grasps the grip (not shown) while swinging the golf club.
  • the golf club head 100 comprises a driver-type club head.
  • the loft angle of the club head 100 can be less than approximately 16 degrees, less than approximately 15 degrees, less than approximately 14 degrees, less than approximately 13 degrees, less than approximately 12 degrees, less than approximately 11 degrees, or less than approximately 10 degrees.
  • the volume of the club head 100 can be greater than approximately 400 cc, greater than approximately 425 cc, greater than approximately 450 cc, greater than approximately 475 cc, greater than approximately 500 cc, greater than approximately 525 cc, greater than approximately 550 cc, greater than approximately 575 cc, greater than approximately 600 cc, greater than approximately 625 cc, greater than approximately 650 cc, greater than approximately 675 cc, or greater than approximately 700 cc.
  • the volume of the club head can be approximately 400cc - 600cc, approximately 500cc - 600cc, approximately 500cc - 650cc, approximately 550cc - 700cc, approximately 600cc - 650cc, approximately 600cc - 700cc, or approximately 600cc - 800cc.
  • the club head can comprise a fairway wood-type club head.
  • the loft angle of the club head 100 can be less than approximately 35 degrees, less than approximately 34 degrees, less than approximately 33 degrees, less than approximately 32 degrees, less than approximately 31 degrees, or less than approximately 30 degrees. Further, in these embodiments, the loft angle of the club head 100 can be greater than approximately 12 degrees, greater than approximately 13 degrees, greater than approximately 14 degrees, greater than approximately 15 degrees, greater than approximately 16 degrees, greater than approximately 17 degrees, greater than approximately 18 degrees, greater than approximately 19 degrees, or greater than approximately 20 degrees.
  • the volume of the club head 100 can be less than approximately 400 cc, less than approximately 375 cc, less than approximately 350 cc, less than approximately 325 cc, less than approximately 300 cc, less than approximately 275 cc, less than approximately 250 cc, less than approximately 225 cc, or less than approximately 200 cc.
  • the volume of the club head can be approximately 300cc - 400cc, approximately 325cc - 400cc, approximately 350cc - 400cc, approximately 250cc - 400cc, approximately 250 - 350 cc, or approximately 275- 375 cc.
  • the club head can comprise a hybrid type club head.
  • the loft angle of the club head 100 can be less than approximately 40 degrees, less than approximately 39 degrees, less than approximately 38 degrees, less than approximately 37 degrees, less than approximately 36 degrees, less than
  • the loft angle of the club head 100 can be greater than approximately 16 degrees, greater than approximately 17 degrees, greater than approximately 18 degrees, greater than approximately 19 degrees, greater than approximately 20 degrees, greater than approximately 21 degrees, greater than approximately 22 degrees, greater than approximately 23 degrees, greater than approximately 24 degrees, or greater than approximately 25 degrees.
  • the volume of the club head 100 can be less than approximately 200 cc, less than approximately 175 cc, less than approximately 150 cc, less than
  • the volume of the club head can be approximately lOOcc - 150cc, approximately 75cc - 150cc, approximately lOOcc - 125cc, or approximately 75cc - 125cc.
  • the golf club head 100 can comprise any type of golf club head.
  • a plurality of grooves or primary grooves 40 are positioned on the club face 38.
  • the strikeface 38 of the club head 100 defines a geometric center 140.
  • the geometric center 140 can be located at the geometric centerpoint of a strikeface perimeter, and at a midpoint of face height.
  • the geometric center 140 also can be centered with respect to engineered impact zone, which can be defined by a region of grooves on the strikeface.
  • the geometric center of the strikeface can be located in accordance with the definition of a golf governing body such as the United States Golf Association (USGA).
  • USGA United States Golf Association
  • the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38 can be determined in accordance with Section 6.1 of the USGA' s Procedure for Measuring the Flexibility of a Golf Clubhead (USGA- TPX3004, Rev. 1.0.0, May 1, 2008) (available at
  • the club head 100 defines a loft plane 10102 tangent to the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38.
  • the club head 100 further defines a coordinate system having an origin located at the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38.
  • the coordinate system has an x' axis 10106, a y' axis 10104, and a z' axis 10108.
  • the x' axis 10106 extends through the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38 in a direction from the heel 22 to the toe 18 of the club head 100.
  • the y' axis 10104 extends through the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38 in a direction from the crown 26 to the sole 30 of the club head 100 and perpendicular to the x' axis 10106.
  • the z' axis 10108 extends through the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38 in a direction from the face 38 to the back end 34 of the club head 100 and is perpendicular to the x' axis 10106 and the y' axis 10104.
  • the coordinate system defines an x'y' plane 10124 extending through the x' axis 10106 and the y' axis 10104; an x'z' plane 10126 extending through the x' axis 10106 and the z' axis 10108; and a y'z' plane 10128 extending through the y' axis 10104 and the z' axis 10108, wherein the x'y' plane 10124, the x'z' plane 10126, and the y'z' plane 10128 are all perpendicular to one another and intersect at the origin of the coordinate system located at the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38.
  • the x'y' plane 10124 extends parallel to the hosel axis 46 and is positioned at an angle corresponding to the loft angle of the club head 100 from the loft plane 10102. Further, the x' axis 10106 is positioned at a 60 degree angle to the hosel axis 46 when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the x'y' plane 10124.
  • the club head 100 can be viewed from a front view (FIG. 2) when the strikeface 38 is viewed from a direction perpendicular to the x'y' plane 10124. Further, in these or other embodiments, the club head 100 can be viewed from a side view or side cross-sectional view (FIG. 164) when the heel 22 is viewed from a direction perpendicular to the y'z' plane 10128.
  • the golf club head 100 further includes a center of gravity or CG 50 (shown in FIGs. 3, 164, and 165) that defines an origin of a coordinate system including an x-axis 54, a y-axis 58, and a z-axis 62.
  • the y-axis 58 (shown in FIGs. 2 and 164) extends through the club head 100 center of gravity 50 from the crown or top 26 to the sole or bottom 30, is parallel to the hosel axis 46 when viewed from the side view, and is positioned at a 30 degree angle from the hosel axis 46 when viewed from a front view (FIGs. 2).
  • the x-axis 54 (shown in FIG.
  • the club head center of gravity 50 extends through the club head center of gravity 50 from the toe or toe end 18 to the heel or heel end 22, perpendicular to y-axis 58 when viewed from a front view and parallel to the x'y' plane 10124.
  • the z-axis 62 (shown in FIGs. 3, 164, and 165) extends through the center of gravity 50 of the club head 100 from the club face 38 to the back end 34 and
  • the x-axis 54 extends through the head CG 50 from the toe or toe end 18 to the heel or heel end 22 and parallel to the x' axis 10106.
  • the y-axis 58 extends through the head CG 50 from the crown or top 26 to the sole or bottom 30 parallel to the y' axis 10104.
  • the z-axis 62 extends through the head CG 50 from the club face 38 to the back end 34 and parallel to the z' axis 10108.
  • the club head 100 further comprises a head depth plane 10120 and a head depth axis 10122, wherein the head depth plane 10120 extends through the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38, perpendicular to the loft plane 10102, in a direction from the heel 22 to the toe 18 of the club head 100, and the head depth axis 10122 extends through the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38, perpendicular to the loft plane 10102.
  • the head CG 50 is located at a head CG depth 10130 from the x'y' plane 10124, measured in a direction perpendicular to the x'y' plane 10124.
  • the head CG 50 can be located at a head CG depth 10130 from the loft plane 10102, measured in a direction perpendicular to the loft plane 10102.
  • the head CG 50 is further located at a head CG height 10132 from the head depth plane 10120, measured in a direction perpendicular to the head depth plane 10120.
  • the head CG height 10132 is measured as the offset distance of the head CG 50 from the head depth plane 10120 in a direction perpendicular to the head depth plane 10120 toward the crown 26 or toward the sole 30.
  • the x-axis 54 and the z-axis 62 are arranged to coincide with numbers on an analog clock in FIG. 3.
  • the z- axis 62 extends between 12 o'clock ("12" through the club face 38) and 6 o'clock ("6" through the back 34), and the x-axis 54 extends between 3 o'clock ("3" through the toe end 18) and 9 o'clock ("9" through the heel end 22).
  • Various golf club head parameters are important in achieving desired performance characteristics, such as club head moment of inertia, club head center of gravity position, and club head center of gravity adjustability.
  • High club head moment of inertia results in increased club head forgiveness for off-center hits.
  • a club head center of gravity positioned low and back i.e. toward the sole and rear of the club head
  • Club head center of gravity adjustability allows for desired trajectory tuning of a club head by an end user.
  • Each of these parameters are important in golf club design to achieve desired or optimal performance characteristics.
  • the embodiments of the golf club heads described below include adjustable weighting systems while maintaining or preventing a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning.
  • many embodiments below describe low profile adjustable weighting systems and/or optimally positioned adjustable weighting systems to maintain a high club head moment of inertia and low and back club head center of gravity position, similar to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system, while providing user adjustability of ball flight and/or trajectory. Maintaining a high club head moment of inertia about the club head CG results in increased forgiveness for off-center hits, and maintaining a high club head moment if inertia about the hosel axis results in increased rotational stability during a swing.
  • the club head 100 comprises a moment of inertia about the x-axis I xx (i.e. crown-to-sole moment of inertia), a moment of inertia about the y-axis Iyy (i.e. heel-to-toe moment of inertia), and a moment of inertia about the hosel axis 46 Ihh.
  • the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein can have a moment of inertia about the x-axis Ixx greater than 3100 g-cm 2 , greater than 3200 g- cm 2 , greater than 3300 g- cm 2 , greater than 3400 g- cm 2 , greater than 3500 g- cm 2 , greater than 3600 g- cm 2 , greater than 3700 g- cm 2 , greater than 3800 g- cm 2 , greater than 3900 g- cm 2 , greater than 4000 g- cm 2 , greater than 4100 g- cm 2 , greater than 4200 g- cm 2 , greater than 4300 g- cm 2 , greater than 4400 g- cm 2 , or greater than 4500 g- cm 2 .
  • the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein have a moment of inertia about the x-axis I xx between 3100 and 4000 g- cm 2 , between 3100 and 3800 g- cm 2 , between 3200 and 4000 g- cm 2 , between 3200 and 4000 g- cm 2 , between 3300 and 4000 g- cm 2 , between 3400 and 4000 g- cm 2 , or between 3500 and 4000 g- cm 2 .
  • the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein can have a moment of inertia about the y-axis Iyy greater than 4700 g- cm 2 , greater than 4800 g- cm 2 , greater than 4900 g- cm 2 , greater than 5000 g- cm 2 , greater than 5100 g- cm 2 , greater than 5200 g- cm 2 , greater than 5300 g- cm 2 , greater than 5400 g- cm 2 , greater than 5500 g- cm 2 , greater than 5600 g- cm 2 , greater than 5700 g- cm 2 , greater than 5800 g- cm 2 , greater than 5900 g- cm 2 , or greater than 6000 g- cm 2 .
  • the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein have a moment of inertia about the y-axis Iyy between 4800 and 6000 g- cm 2 , between 4900 and 6000 g- cm 2 , between 5000 and 6000 g- cm 2 , between 5100 and 6000 g- cm 2 , between 5200 and 6000 g- cm 2 , between 5300 and 6000 g- cm 2 , or between 5400 and 6000 g- cm 2 .
  • the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein can have a moment of inertia about the hosel-axis Ihh greater than 7500 g- cm 2 , greater than 8000 g- cm 2 , greater than 8250 g- cm 2 , greater than 8500 g- cm 2 , greater than 8750 g- cm 2 , greater than 9000 g- cm 2 , greater than 9050 g- cm 2 , or greater than 10000 g- cm 2 .
  • the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein have a moment of inertia about the hosel-axis Ihh between 7500 and 10000 g- cm 2 , between 8000 and 10000 g- cm 2 , between 8500 and 10000 g- cm 2 , or between 9000 and 10000 g- cm 2 .
  • many embodiments of the club heads with adjustable weighting systems comprise a combined moment of inertia about the head CG (MOICG) defined as the sum of the moment of inertia about the x-axis and the moment of inertia about the y-axis.
  • MOICG head CG
  • the combined moment of inertia about the head center of gravity MOICG can be greater than 7600 g-in 2 , greater than 7700 g- cm 2 , greater than 7800 g- cm 2 , greater than 7900 g- cm 2 , greater than 8000 g- cm 2 , greater than 8100 g- cm 2 , greater than 8200 g- cm 2 , greater than 8300 g- cm 2 , greater than 8400 g- cm 2 , greater than 8500 g- cm 2 , greater than 8600 g- cm 2 , greater than 8700 g- cm 2 , greater than 8800 g- cm 2 , greater than 8900 g- cm 2 , greater than 9000 g- cm 2 , greater than 9100 g- cm 2 , greater than 9200 g- cm 2 , or greater than 9300 g- cm 2 .
  • the combined moment of inertia about the club head head center of gravity MOICG can be between 7700 and 9500 g- cm 2 , between 7800 and 9500 g- cm 2 , between 7900 and 9500 g- cm 2 , between 8000 and 9500 g- cm 2 , between 8100 and 9500 g- cm 2 , between 8200 and 9500 g- cm 2 , or between 8300 and 9500 g- cm 2 .
  • many embodiments of the club heads with adjustable weighting systems comprise a combined moment of inertia about the head CG and hosel (MOICG-H), defined as the sum of the moment of inertia about the x-axis, the moment of inertia about the y-axis, and the moment of inertia about the hosel axis.
  • MOICG-H moment of inertia about the head CG and hosel
  • the combined moment of inertia about the head CG and hosel MOICG-H can be greater than 14800 g- cm 2 , greater than 14900 g- cm 2 , greater than 15000 g- cm 2 , greater than 15100 g- cm 2 , greater than 15200 g- cm 2 , greater than 15300 g- cm 2 , greater than 15400 g- cm 2 , greater than 15500 g- cm 2 , greater than 15600 g- cm 2 , greater than 15700 g- cm 2 , greater than 15800 g- cm 2 , greater than 15900 g- cm 2 , greater than 16000 g- cm 2 , greater than 16200 g- cm 2 , greater than 16400 g- cm 2 , greater than 16600 g- cm 2 , greater than 16800 g- cm 2 , greater than 17000 g- cm 2 , greater than 17200 g- cm
  • the combined moment of inertia about the head CG and hosel MOICG-H can be between 15000 and 19500 g- cm 2 , between 15000 and 19000 g- cm 2 , between 15000 and 18000 g- cm 2 , between 16000 and 19500 g- cm 2 , between 16000 and 19000 g- cm 2 , or between 16000 and 18000 g- cm 2 .
  • the combined moment of inertia about the head CG and hosel MOICG-H can be greater than 15000 g- cm 2 for club heads with adjustable weighting systems having a volume between 425 and 450 cubic centimeters (cc), and the combined moment of inertia about the head CG and hosel MOICG-H can be greater than 17000 g- cm 2 for club heads with adjustable weighting systems having a volume between 450 and 500 cubic centimeters (cc).
  • the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein can have a head CG depth 10130 greater than 1.6 inches, greater than 1.65 inches, greater than 1.7 inches, greater than 1.75 inches, greater than 1.8 inches, greater than 1.85 inches, greater than 1.9 inches, greater than 1.95 inches, or greater than 2.0 inches.
  • the club head having the adjustable weighting systems can have a head CG depth 10130 between 1.61 and 2.0 inches, between 1.65 and 2.0 inches, between 1.7 and 2.0 inches, between 1.8 and 2.0 inches, between 1.61 and 3.0 inches, between 1.65 and 3.0 inches, between 1.7 and 3.0 inches, between 1.8 and 3.0 inches, between 1.9 and 3.0 inches, or between 2.0 and 3.0 inches.
  • the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein can have a head CG height 10132 located below the head depth plane 10120 (i.e. located between the head depth plane 10120 and the sole 30 of the club head). Further, the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein can have a head CG height 10132 located within 0.10 inch, within 0.09 inch, within 0.08 inch, within 0.07 inch, within 0.06 inch, within 0.05 inch, or within 0.04 inch of the head depth plane 10120 toward the crown 26 or toward the sole 30 of the club head.
  • the adjustable weight system includes one or more weights that are repositionable to a plurality of discrete portions or attachment locations of the club head to adjust the head CG position. Adjusting the head CG position using the adjustable weight systems described herein can affect ball trajectory and/or spin characteristics of the club head at impact, while maintaining a high club head moment of inertia.
  • the adjustable weighting system can comprise two or more discrete attachment locations for receiving the one or more weights.
  • the adjustable weight system includes two, three, four, or five discrete attachment locations.
  • the attachment locations can include a first attachment location positioned toward the back end 34 and the toe 18 and a second attachment location positioned toward the back end 24 and the heel 22 of the club head.
  • a distance between the first attachment location and the second attachment location can be greater than 0.8 inch, greater than 0.9 inch, greater than 1.0 inch, greater than 1.1 inches, greater than 1.2 inches, or greater than 1.3 inches.
  • the distance between the first attachment location and the second attachment location can be between 0.8-1.3 inches, between 0.9-1.3 inches, between 1.0-1.3 inches, or between 1.1-1.3 inches.
  • the attachment locations can include a first attachment location A positioned toward the back end 34 and the toe 18, a second attachment location C positioned toward the back end 34 and the heel 22, and a third attachment location B.
  • the third attachment location B can be positioned centrally and toward the back end 34 of the club head, generally aligned with or adjacent to the head depth axis 10122, and/or between the first and second attachment locations A, C.
  • a distance between adjacent attachment locations e.g.
  • the distance between the first attachment A location and the third attachment location B, or the distance between the second attachment location C and the third attachment location B) can be greater than 0.5 inch, greater than 0.6 inch, greater than 0.7 inch, greater than 0.8 inch, greater than 0.9 inch, or greater than 1.0 inch.
  • the distance between adjacent attachment locations e.g. the distance between the first attachment location A and the third attachment location B, or the distance between the second attachment location C and the third attachment location B
  • the adjustable weighting system can include any number of discrete attachment locations greater than one, such as, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, or more discrete attachment locations.
  • a distance between adjacent attachment locations can be greater than 0.4 inch, greater than 0.5 inch, greater than 0.6 inch, greater than 0.7 inch, greater than 0.8 inch, or greater than 0.9 inch.
  • the distance between adjacent attachment locations can be between 0.4-0.9 inch, between 0.5-0.9 inch, between 0.6-0.9 inch, or between 0.7-0.9 inch.
  • a distance between adjacent attachment locations can be greater than 0.3 inch, greater than 0.4 inch, greater than 0.5 inch, greater than 0.6 inch, greater than 0.7 inch, or greater than 0.8 inch.
  • the distance between adjacent attachment locations can be between 0.3-0.8 inch, between 0.4-0.8 inch, between 0.5-0.8 inch, or between 0.6-0.8 inch.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations of the club heads having adjustable weighting systems described herein can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the fastener can comprise the same material as the body, or a material having a lighter density than the body, such that the fastener does not contribute to the adjustable weighting properties of the club head.
  • the apertures or recesses or ports can be threaded to receive a threaded fastener.
  • the adjustable weighting system is devoid of multiple and/or deep ports or recesses that require significant internal structure required to secure one or more weights within the ports or recesses.
  • the adjustable weighting system further comprises one or more weights positionable at the plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the one or more weights can have a height 10152 measured in a crown to sole direction, parallel to the y-axis 58, when the weight is coupled to one or more of the attachment locations, a width 10154 measured in a heel to toe direction, parallel to the x-axis 54, when the weight is coupled to one or more of the attachment locations, and a depth 10156 measured in a front to back direction, parallel to the z-axis 62, when the weight is coupled to one or more of the attachment locations.
  • the height 10152 can be less than 0.5 inch, less than 0.4 inch, less than 0.3 inch, less than 0.25 inch, less than 0.2 inch, less than 0.18 inch, less than 0.16 inch, less than 0.14 inch, less than 0.12 inch, or less than 0.10 inch.
  • the width 10154 can be less than 1.3 inches, less than 1.2 inches, less than 1.1 inches, less than 1.0 inch, less than 0.9 inch, less than 0.8 inch, less than 0.7 inch, less than 0.6 inch, less than 0.5 inch, or less than 0.4 inch.
  • the depth 10156 can be less than 1.0 inch, less than 0.9 inch, less than 0.8 inch, less than 0.7 inch, less than 0.6 inch, less than 0.5 inch, less than 0.4 inch, less than 0.3 inch, less than 0.2 inch, or less than 0.1 inch.
  • one or more of the weights can have a surface area in contact with the club head body when the weight is coupled to any of the attachment.
  • the surface area of the weight in contact with the club head can be less than 0.75 inch 2 , less than 0.7 inch 2 , less than 0.65 inch 2 , less than 0.6 inch 2 , less than 0.55 inch 2 , less than 0.5 inch 2 , less than 0.45 inch 2 , less than 0.4 inch 2 , less than 0.35 inch 2 , less than 0.3 inch 2 , or less than 0.25 inch 2 .
  • the adjustable weighting system includes a first weight W positionable in the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head.
  • the adjustable weight system can further comprise additional weights, such as a second weight, a third weight, a fourth weight, and a fifth weight positionable in the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head.
  • each weight of the plurality of weights can be positioned in a different discrete attachment location on the club head.
  • each weight of the plurality of weights can be removed and replaced or repositioned in different discrete attachment locations on the club head. While the embodiments of the adjustable weight system described herein include up to five weights, other embodiments can include adjustable weighting systems having any number of weights.
  • the first weight is heavier than the remaining weights (e.g. the second weight, the third weight, the fourth weight, and/or the fifth weight).
  • the first weight can comprises a mass greater than 10 grams, greater than 12 grams, greater than 14 grams, greater than 16 grams, greater than 18 grams, greater than 20 grams, greater than 22 grams, greater than 24 grams, greater than 26 grams, greater than 28 grams, or greater than 30 grams.
  • first weight can comprises a mass between 6 and 50 grams, between 10 and 50 grams, between 15 and 50 grams, between 20 and 50 grams, between 15 and 40 grams, between 20 and 40 grams, between 25 and 35 grams, between 10 and 25 grams, between 15 and 25 grams, between 10 and 20 grams, or between 15 and 20 grams.
  • the remaining weights can comprise a mass less than 20 grams, less than 18 grams, less than 16 grams, less than 14 grams, less than 12 grams, less than 10 grams, less than 8 grams, less than 6 grams, less than 4 grams, or less than 2 grams.
  • the remaining weights can comprise a mass between 0.10 and 15 grams, between 0.25 and 10 grams, between 0.5 and 7 grams, or between 1 and 10 grams.
  • the first weight can be positioned in any of the discrete attachment locations.
  • the first weight can be positioned in the first attachment location positioned near the toe 18 or the second attachment location positioned near the heel 22.
  • shifting the first weight from the first attachment location to the second attachment location shifts the head CG toward the heel 22, and shifting the first weight from the second attachment location to the first attachment location shifts the head CG toward the toe 18.
  • the remaining attachment location can be devoid of a weight, or the remaining attachment location can comprise an additional weight (e.g. the second weight).
  • the first weight W can be positioned in the third attachment location B positioned centrally, thereby generating a neutral head CG position.
  • the first weight can be shifted from the third attachment location B to the first attachment location A, positioned toward the toe 18, thereby shifting the head CG 50 toward the toe 18 by a distance.
  • the first weight W can be shifted from the third attachment location B to the second attachment location C, positioned toward the heel 22, thereby shifting the head CG 50 toward the heel 22 by a distance.
  • the remaining locations can be devoid of weights, or the remaining locations can comprise additional weights (e.g. the second weight and/or the third weight).
  • Shifting the first weight W from an attachment location nearest the toe 18 to an attachment location nearest the heel 22 can shift the head CG 50 by a distance of at least 0.10 inch, at least 0.15 inch, at least 0.20 inch, at least 0.25 inch, or at least 0.30 inch, in a direction extending parallel to the x-axis 54.
  • a distance of at least 0.10 inch, at least 0.15 inch, at least 0.20 inch, at least 0.25 inch, or at least 0.30 inch in a direction extending parallel to the x-axis 54.
  • shifting the first weight W from an attachment location nearest the toe 18 to an attachment location nearest the heel 22 can shift the head CG 50 by a distance between 0.10 and 0.30 inch, between 0.15 and 0.30 inch, between 0.20 and 0.30 inch, between 0.15 and 0.25 inch, or between 0.20 and 0.25 inch.
  • shifting the head CG 50 toward the toe 18 can generate a fade or correct for a hook. Conversely, shifting the head CG 50 toward the heel 22 can generate a draw or correct for a slice. In the embodiments of the adjustable weighting system described below, shifting head CG 50 in a direction extending parallel to the x-axis 54 between 0.10 and 0.30 inch can result in a change in shot bend of 4.6 to 13.9 yards.
  • Other embodiments can include one or more discrete attachment locations positioned toward the strike face 38 of the club head 100.
  • shifting one or more weights to an attachment location(s) near the back end 34 of the club head 100 from an attachment location near the strike face 38 can increase the club head moment of inertia about the head CG MOICG and increase dynamic loft or launch angle of a golf ball.
  • shifting one or more weights to an attachment location(s) near the strike face 38 of the club head 100 from an attachment location near the back end 34 can reduce dynamic loft or launch angle of a golf ball.
  • the embodiments of the club heads having adjustable weighting systems described herein maximize head CG depth 10130 and club head moment of inertia (or minimize the reduction in head CG depth 10130 and club head moment of inertia typically associated with introducing adjustability compared to a non-adjustable club head).
  • the maximized head CG depth and club head moment of inertia are achieved with first adjustable weight having a relatively low mass, thereby increasing the efficiency of the design to maintain club head performance characteristics (e.g. forgiveness, low back spin, high launch), while enabling user adjustability of ball spin and/or trajectory.
  • the club heads having adjustable weighting systems comprise a depth to mass ratio of the head CG depth 10130 to the mass of the first weight W m .
  • the depth to mass ratio of the club head can be greater than 0.060 inch/gram, greater than 0.070 inch/gram, greater than 0.080 inch/gram, greater than 0.090 inch/gram, greater than 0.100 inch/gram, greater than 0.1 10 inch/gram, greater than 0.120 inch/gram, or greater than 0.130 inch/gram.
  • the depth to mass ratio can be between 0.070 and 0.13 inch/gram, between 0.080 and 0.13 inch/gram, between 0.090 and 0.13 inch/gram, between 0.070 and 0.1 1 inch/gram, between 0.080 and 0.1 1 inch/gram, or between 0.090 and 0.1 1 inch/gram.
  • the mass of the first weight can be less than 25 grams, less than 24 grams, less than 23 grams, less than 22 grams, less than 20 grams, less than 19 grams, less than 18 grams, less than 17 grams, less than 16 grams, or less than 15 grams.
  • the mass of the first weight can be between 10 and 20 grams, between 12 and 20 grams, between 14 and 20 grams, between 16 and 20 grams, between 10 and 18 grams, between 12 and 18 grams, or between 14 and 18 grams.
  • the club heads having adjustable weighting systems can comprise a first inertia to mass ratio defined as the combined moment of inertia about the head CG MOICG to the mass of the first weight W m .
  • the first inertia to mass ratio can be greater than 400 cm 2 , greater than 410 cm 2 , greater than 420 cm 2 , greater than 430 cm 2 , greater than 440 cm 2 , greater than 450 cm 2 , greater than 460 cm 2 , greater than 470 cm 2 , greater than 480 cm 2 , greater than 490 cm 2 , greater than 500 cm 2 , greater than 510 cm 2 , greater than 520 cm 2 , greater than 530 cm 2 , greater than 540 cm 2 , or greater than 550 cm 2 .
  • the first inertia to mass ratio can be between 400 and 550 cm 2 , between 410 and 550 cm 2 , between 420 and 550 cm 2 , between 430 and 550 cm 2 , between 440 and 550 cm 2 , between 450 and 550 cm 2 , between 400 and 500 cm , between 410 and 500 cm , between 420 and 500 cm 2 , between 430 and 500 cm 2 , between 440 and 500 cm 2 , or between 450 and 500 cm 2 .
  • the mass of the first weight can be less than 25 grams, less than 24 grams, less than 23 grams, less than 22 grams, less than 20 grams, less than 19 grams, less than 18 grams, less than 17 grams, less than 16 grams, or less than 15 grams.
  • the mass of the first weight can be between 10 and 20 grams, between 12 and 20 grams, between 14 and 20 grams, between 16 and 20 grams, between 10 and 18 grams, between 12 and 18 grams, or between 14 and 18 grams.
  • the embodiments of the club heads having adjustable weighting systems described herein maximize the total shift in head CG as achievable by adjusting the one or more weights to the plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the maximized total shift in head CG is achieved with first adjustable weight having a relatively low mass, thereby increasing the efficiency of the design to maintain club head performance characteristics (e.g. forgiveness, low back spin, high launch) while enabling user adjustability of ball spin and/or trajectory.
  • the club heads having adjustable weighting systems comprise a head CG to mass ratio defined as the total shift in head CG or maximum head CG shift to the mass of the first weight.
  • the head CG to mass ratio can be greater than 0.008 inch/gram, greater than 0.009 inch/gram, greater than 0.010 inch/gram, greater than 0.011 inch/gram, greater than 0.012 inch/gram, greater than 0.013 inch/gram, greater than 0.014 inch/gram, or greater than 0.015 inch/gram.
  • the head CG to mass ratio can be between 0.008 and 0.015 inch/gram, between 0.009 and 0.015 inch/gram, between 0.010 and 0.015 inch/gram, between 0.008 and 0.013 inch/gram, between 0.009 and 0.013 inch/gram, or between 0.010 and 0.013 inch/gram.
  • the mass of the first weight can be less than 25 grams, less than 24 grams, less than 23 grams, less than 22 grams, less than 20 grams, less than 19 grams, less than 18 grams, less than 17 grams, less than 16 grams, or less than 15 grams.
  • the mass of the first weight can be between 10 and 20 grams, between 12 and 20 grams, between 14 and 20 grams, between 16 and 20 grams, between 10 and 18 grams, between 12 and 18 grams, or between 14 and 18 grams.
  • the one or more weights of the adjustable weighting system comprise a weight CG 10134.
  • the weight CG is positioned near a rear perimeter or skirt 10136 of the club head when viewed from a top or bottom view (FIG. 165), and at a maximized distance 10138 from the geometric center 140 of the strike face 38.
  • Positioning the weight CG 10134 near the rear perimeter 10136 of the club head 100 or away from the strike face 38 can increase perimeter weighting and club head moment of inertia, thereby resulting in increased club head forgiveness for off center hits, compared to adjustable weights positioned closer to the strike face.
  • weight CG 10134 near the rear perimeter 10136 or away from the strike face 38 can result in a head CG position that is lower and farther back, thereby increasing club head moment of inertia and reducing back spin, back compared to adjustable weights positioned closer to the strike face.
  • the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights is positioned at a distance 10142 from the rear perimeter 10136 of the club head 100 when the weight is positioned at one or more of the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head 100.
  • the distance 10142 can be measured as the projected distance from the weight CG to the perimeter 10136 when the club head is viewed from a bottom view, perpendicular to the x'z' plane 10126, when the weight is positioned at one or more of the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head 100. Further, the distance 10142 can be measured in a direction parallel to the x'z' plane 10126, when the weight is positioned at one or more of the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head 100.
  • the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights can be positioned within 0.7 inch, within 0.65 inch, within 0.6 inch, within 0.55 inch, within 0.5 inch, within 0.45 inch, within 0.4 inch, within 0.35 inch, within 0.3 inch, within 0.25 inch, or within 0.2 inch of the rear perimeter 10136 of the club head 100.
  • the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights can be positioned between 0.10 and 0.50 inch, between 0.25 and 0.5 inch, between 0.10 and 0.25 inch, between 0.10 and 0.35 inch, or between 0.10 and 0.45 inch from the rear perimeter 10136 of the club head 100.
  • the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights is positioned at a distance 10138 from the geometric center 140 of the strike face 38 of the club head 100 when the weight is positioned at one or more of the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head 100.
  • the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights can be positioned at a distance 10138 greater than 2.0 inches, greater than 2.25 inches, greater than 2.5 inches, greater than 2.75 inches, greater than 3.0 inches, greater than 3.25 inches, greater than 3.5 inches, or greater than 3.75 inches from the geometric center of the strike face.
  • the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights can be positioned at a distance 10138 between 2.0 and 3.5 inches, between 2.5 and 3.5 inches, between 2.0 and 3.0 inches, between 2.5 and 3.0 inches, between 2.5 and 4.0 inches, between 3.0 and 3.75 inches, between 3.0 and 4.0 inches, between 3.2 and 4.0 inches, or between 3.5 and 4.0 inches from the geometric center 140 of the strike face 38. Positioning the weight CG 10134 away from the geometric center 140 of the strike face 38 can increase perimeter weighting and club head moment of inertia, thereby resulting in increased club head forgiveness for off center hits, compared to adjustable weights positioned closer to the strike face.
  • the weight CG 10134 protrudes from an external contour or outer surface 10146 of the sole 30, is positioned flush with the external contour 10146 of the sole 30, and/or is positioned minimally inset relative to the external contour 10146 of the sole 30. Positioning the weight CG 10134 minimally inset, flush with, or external relative to the external contour 10146 of the sole 30 requires less structural support material to receive the one or more weights, thereby maintaining a low profile adjustable weighting system.
  • positioning the weight CG 10134 minimally inset, flush with, or external relative to the external contour 10146 of the sole 30 can increase perimeter weighting and club head moment of inertia, thereby resulting in increased club head forgiveness for off center hits, compared to internal adjustable weights or adjustable weights recessed into the club head. Further, positioning the weight CG 10134 minimally inset, flush with, or external relative to the external contour 10146 of the sole 30 can result in a head CG position that is lower and farther back, thereby increasing club head moment of inertia and reducing back spin, back compared to internal adjustable weights or adjustable weights recessed into the club head.
  • the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights is positioned at a distance 10148 from the external contour 10146 of the sole 30 when the weight is positioned at one or more of the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head 100, wherein the distance 10148 is measured in a direction parallel to the y- axis 58.
  • the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights can protrude from the external contour 10146 of the sole by up to 0.10 inch, up to 0.15 inch, up to 0.20 inch, up to 0.25 inch, or up to 0.30 inch.
  • the weight CG 10134 of the one or more weights protrudes from the external contour 10146 of the sole 30 by 0.10 to 0.25 inch, by 0.15 to 0.25 inch, by 0.15 to 0.25 inch, or by 0.15 to 0.30 inch.
  • the weight CG 10134 can be inset relative to the external contour 10146 of the sole 30 by a distance 10148 of less than 0.15 inch, less than 0.14 inch, less than 0.13 inch, less than 0.125 inch, less than 0.12 inch, less than 0.11 inch, less than 0.10 inch, less than 0.09 inch, less than 0.08 inch, or less than 0.07 inch.
  • the weight CG 10134 of the one or more weights is inset relative to the external contour 10148 of the sole 30 by a distance 10148 between 0.05 and 0.15 inch, between 0.05 and 0.125 inch, between 0.05 and 0.15 inch, between 0.10 and 0.15 inch, between 0.10 and 0.125 inch, or between 0.10 and 0.15 inch.
  • the club head 10 includes an adjustable weighting system 66.
  • the adjustable weighting system 66 is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 10 center of gravity 50 and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 66 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 10 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 66. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 66 ensures that shifts in the club head 10 CG occur mainly in a heel end 22 to toe end 18 direction keeping the overall club head 10 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 66 can include a plurality of raised portions 78.
  • the plurality of raised portions 78 can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 66 includes three raised portions 78A, B, C. Each raised portion 78 comprises a discrete attachment location.
  • Each discrete attachment location comprises a feature in the form of a protruding body 2470A, B, C.
  • the protruding bodies, 2470A, B, C can receive one or more weight 2482.
  • the number of protruding bodies 70 varies.
  • the adjustable weighting system 66 includes just a single protruding body 70.
  • the adjustable weighting system 66 includes two protruding bodies 70.
  • the adjustable weighting system 66 includes more than three protruding bodies 70.
  • the adjustable weighting system 66 can include 3, 4, 5 or 6 protruding bodies 70.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 70 extends from one or more areas of the club head 10 other than that illustrated.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 70 extends from the crown or top 26.
  • the protruding bodies 70 can extend from the heel end 22, the toe end 18, the rear end 34, the trailing edge 71, the skirt or the periphery portions of the club head body 14. Accordingly, the number and locations of the protruding bodies 70 can correspond to the number of weight shifting options of the adjustable weight system 66.
  • the three protruding bodies 70A, B, C are generally spaced evenly apart from one another, such that a first of the protruding bodies 70A is positioned generally at the toe or toe end 18, a second of the protruding bodies 70C is positioned generally at the heel or heel end 22, and a third of the protruding bodies 70B is positioned between the toe or toe end 18 and the heel or heel end 22.
  • Each of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 82 to the club head 10. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the club head 10.
  • the protruding bodies 70A, B, C are positioned differently.
  • the protruding bodies 70A, B, C can be spaced unevenly from one another.
  • the two or more protruding bodies 70A, B, C are positioned generally at the toe or toe end 18, and a single protruding body 70A, B, C is positioned at the heel or heel end 22.
  • two or more protruding bodies 70A, B, C are positioned generally at the heel or heel end 22, and a single protruding body 70A, B, C is positioned at the toe or toe end 18.
  • the protruding bodies 70 A, B, C can be positioned at any location on the club head 14 being spaced any distance apart from one another.
  • the protruding bodies 70A, B, C are each positioned generally adjacent a trailing edge 72 (FIG. 4) of the club head 10.
  • the trailing edge 72 extends between the toe or toe end 18 and the heel or heel end 22, and defines an intersection of the sole or bottom 30 and the crown or top 26 along the rear or back end 34.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C are positioned away from the trailing edge 72 (e.g., more centrally within the sole or bottom 30, or more centrally within the crown or top 26).
  • the protruding bodies 70A, B, C each extend from an outer surface 74 of the club head body 14.
  • the outer surface 74 includes three raised portions 78.
  • the protruding bodies 70A, B, C extend generally perpendicularly from the raised portions 78.
  • the raised portions 78 are each generally elevated, planar surfaces along the club head 10, and the protruding bodies 70A, B, C extend from centers of the raised portions 78.
  • the raised portions 78 have different shapes or contours, and/or the protruding bodies 70A, B, C extend from areas other than the centers of the raised portions 78.
  • the protruding bodies 70A, B, C extend outwardly from the outer surface 74, and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 70A, B, C (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 70A, B, C are each generally cylindrical in shape.
  • the protruding bodies 70A, B, C have square cross- sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or any other shapes configured to harbor the complementary weight having a cavity configured to fits around the protruding body 70A,B,C.
  • the weights 82 may be coupled to the club head 14, such that a portion of the weight 82 extends beyond the outer contour of the club head body 14. In the illustrated embodiment, the center of gravity of each weight 82 is positioned within 1 inch from the trailing edge 72, or periphery of the club head body 14.
  • each weight 82 can be positioned within 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2 or 0.1 inches of the trailing edge 72, or periphery of the club head body 14.
  • weights 82 are coupled to the protruding bodies 70.
  • each weight 82 has a cylindrical shape comprising an aperture 86 extending there through.
  • Each of the weights 82 is identical in size and shape, although in other embodiments the size and shape of one weight 82 may differ from the size and shape of another weight 82.
  • the weight 82 may have a circular, triangular, rectangular, polygonal, trapezoidal, or any other suitable shape.
  • the weight 82 can be described as a shallow weight 82, such that the weight 82 is low profile.
  • the weight 82 can include a height which can be between 0.05 to 1.5 inches In other embodiments, the weight 82 can include a height which is between 0.05-0.1, 0.1-0.2, 0.2-0.3, 0.3-0.4, 0.4-0.5, 0.5-0.6, 0.6- 0.7, 0.7-0.8, 0.8-0.9,0.9-1.0, 1.0-1.1, 1.1-1.2, 1.2-1.3, 1.3-1.4 or 1.4-1.5 inches.
  • the height of the weight 82 can correspond with the height of the protruding body 70, such that the top of the weight 82 is flush with the top of the protruding body 70 when coupled together. In other embodiments, the height of the weight 82 can be less than the height of the protruding body 70, such that the protruding body 70 extends past the top of the weight 82 when coupled together. In other
  • the height of the weight 82 can be greater than the height of the protruding body 70, such that the weight 82 extends past the top of the protruding body 70 when coupled together.
  • the apertures extending through the weights 82 are generally cylindrical apertures 86 that are sized and shaped to receive the protruding bodies 70.
  • the apertures 86 can comprise other shaped
  • the apertures 86 can have a polygonal, triangular, rectangular, circular, trapezoidal, ovular, elliptical, or any other suitable shaped cross-section extending through the weight 82.
  • the apertures 86 are through apertures 86 that extend entirely through the weights 82.
  • the weights 82 have blind apertures extending only partially through the weight 82.
  • the protruding bodies 70A, B, C have external threads, and the weights 82 have internal threads within the apertures 86, such that the weights 82 are threadably coupled to the protruding bodies 70A, B, C.
  • the weights 82 are coupled to the protruding bodies 70A, B, C with friction fits, with snap-fit mechanisms, with set screws positioned within threaded inner surfaces of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C, or with other structures.
  • the weights 82 are generally flat, to increase club head moment of inertia.
  • the weights 82 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 82 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 82 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic.
  • the weights 82 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 82 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 82.
  • each of the weights 82 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass.
  • the weights 82 may vary in both volume and material from one another.
  • one of the structures labeled as 82 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 70.
  • the weights may vary between 0.1-50g.
  • one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-1 Og, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 82 may vary between 0-1 Og
  • a second weight 82 may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight 82 may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight 82 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 82 may vary between l-5g
  • a second and third weight 82 may vary between 5-30g.
  • a first and second weight 82 may vary between 1-lOg
  • a third and fourth weight 82 may vary between 5-25g.
  • a first weight 6382 can have a mass of 8.5 grams
  • a second and third weight 6382 each can have a mass of 1.5 grams.
  • a first weight 6382 can have a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 6382 each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6382 can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6382 each can have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6382 can have a mass of 10- 20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight 6382 (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight 6382) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight 6382 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 , 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights 82 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0. l-50g.
  • each of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C receives a weight 82.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C receives a weight 82, while the remaining protruding bodies 70A, B, C are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C receives more than one weight 82.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 70 A, B, C does not extend past an outer profile of the club head 10, such that even if the protruding body 70A, B, C is left bare and uncovered, the protruding body will not interfere with or disrupt a golfer's swing.
  • the weights 82 may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 70A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 10 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias.
  • a heavier weight 82 is positioned on the protruding body 70B located between the toe or toe end 18 and the heel or heel end 22, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding bodies 70A, B near the toe or toe end 18 and the heel or heel end 22.
  • the aforementioned weight 82 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 34 of the club head 10.
  • a heavier weight 82 is positioned on the protruding body 70C near the heel or heel end 22, while lighter weights 82 are positioned on the protruding body 70A near the toe or toe end 18 and on the protruding body 70B that is located between the toe or toe end 18 and the heel or heel end 22.
  • the aforementioned weight 82 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 22 of the club head 10.
  • a heavier weight 82 is positioned on the protruding body 70 A near the toe or toe end 18, while lighter weights 82 are positioned on the protruding body 70C near the heel or heel end 22 and on the protruding body 70B that is located between the toe or toe end 18 and the heel or heel end 22.
  • the aforementioned weight 6382 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 6318 of the club head 6310.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 70A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 82 or set of weights 82. In some embodiments, multiple different weights 82 may be used interchangeably with the same protruding body 70A, B, C.
  • the protruding bodies 70A, B, C include exterior threads, and the corresponding weights that couple to the protruding bodies 70A, B, C include interior threads (e.g., in apertures of the weights similar to the weights 82 described above), such that the weights are threadably coupled to the protruding bodies 70A, B, C.
  • the weights 82 are coupled to the protruding bodies 70A, B, C with friction fits, with snap-fit mechanisms, with set screws positioned within threaded inner surfaces of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C, or with other structures.
  • the adjustable weighting system 66 of golf club head 10 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 66 of golf club head 10 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 10 having the adjustable weighting system 66 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 6 and 7 illustrate a club head 110 having a club head body 114.
  • the club head 110 includes an adjustable weighting system 166 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 110 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 166 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 100 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 166.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 166 ensures that shifts in the club head 100 CG occur mainly in a heel end 122 to toe end 118 direction keeping the overall club head 100 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 166 is similar to the adjustable weighting system 66, except the adjustable weighting system 166 includes a plurality of recessed portions 180A, B, C instead of a plurality of raised portions 78.
  • Each recessed portion 180A, B, C can comprise a recessed surfacel81A, B, C.
  • the recessed surfacesl81A, B, C can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 166 includes three recessed portions 180 A, B, C each having a recessed surface 181 A, B, C.
  • the recessed surfaces 181 A, B, C each comprise a discrete attachment location.
  • the discrete attachment locations each comprise features which can be in the form of protruding bodies 170 A, B, C.
  • the protruding bodies can be configured to receive a weight 182, except the weighting system 166 includes a recess 180.
  • the weight 182 can be similar to the weight 82 described above and can have the same size, shape, and weight.
  • the adjustable weighting system 166 includes three protruding bodies 170 (A, B, C), positioned in the same configuration as described in the adjustable weighting system 66.
  • Each protruding body 170A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 182 to the club head 110.
  • the protruding bodies 170 may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights 182 may be coupled to the protruding bodies 170 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 170 are each generally cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 170 have square cross- sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or any other shapes.
  • protruding bodies 170 may be positioned at any position on the club head body 114 similar to the protruding bodies 70 and club head body 14.
  • the protruding bodies 170 each extend outwardly from an outer surface 174 of the club head body 114 along a sole or bottom 130 of the club head 110.
  • the club head 110 includes three recessed portions 180 (in contrast to the three raised portions 78 in FIGS. 4 and 5).
  • the recessed portion 180 includes a recessed surface 181 positioned at a depth offset from the sole 130 of the club head 10.
  • the protruding bodies 170 extend generally perpendicularly from recessed surfaces 181 in the recessed portions 180.
  • the recessed surfaces 181 forming part of the overall outer surface 174 of the club head 110.
  • the recessed surfaces 181 are each generally recessed, planar surfaces along the club head 110, and the protruding bodies 170 extend from centers of the recessed surfaces 181.
  • the recessed surfaces 181 have different shapes or contours, and/or the protruding bodies 170 extend from areas other than the centers of the recessed portions 170.
  • the recessed surfaces 181 may extend a depth of 0.01 to 0.5 inches into the club head body 14.
  • the recessed surfaces 181 may extend a depth of 0.01 to 0.05, 0.03 to 0.07, 0.05 to 0.1, 0.07 to 0.15, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.15 to 0.25, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.25 to 0.35, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.35 to 0.45, 0.4 to 0.5 inches into the club head 14.
  • the recessed surface 181 may extend a depth into the club head body 114 such that when the weights 182 are coupled to the club head bodyl 14, the weights 182 extend at least partially beyond the outer contour of the club head body 114.
  • the adjustable weighting system 166 of golf club head 110 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 166 of golf club head 110 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 110 having the adjustable weighting system 166 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 8-10 illustrate a club head 210 having a club head body 214.
  • the club head 210 includes an adjustable weighting system 266 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 210 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 266 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 210 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 266. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 266 ensures that shifts in the club head 210 CG occur mainly in a heel end 222 to toe end 218 direction keeping the overall club head 210 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 266 includes at least one discrete attachment location.
  • the at least one discrete attachment location can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 266 includes one discrete attachment position.
  • the discrete attachment location comprises a feature in the form of a protruding body 270.
  • the protruding body 270 is configured to receive at least one weight 282 .
  • the protruding body 270 may be of any shape and any configuration such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding body 270 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the weight 282 may be coupled to the club head 214, such that a portion of the weight 282 extends beyond the outer contour of the club head body 214.
  • adjustable weighting system 266 includes a single protruding body 270 that extends outwardly from an outer surface 274 of the club head body 214.
  • the protruding body 270 extends from a generally central position between the heel end 222 and toe end 218 of the club head body 210.
  • the protruding body 270 can extend from any position on the club head 210 similar to the protrusions 70, 170.
  • the protruding body 270 (FIG. 10) defines a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 282 to the club head 210.
  • the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the club head 10.
  • the protruding body 270 has generally a square cross-sectional shape, which tapers moving away from the outer surface 274 of the club head body 214, such that the generally square cross- section decreases in size moving away from the outer surface 274. As illustrated in FIG. 10, the protruding body 270 has rounds 276 and fillets 280, which give the protruding body 270 a smooth appearance and shape. In other embodiments, the protruding body 270 can have a generally circular, triangular, polygonal, trapezoidal or any other suitable cross-sectional shape.
  • the weight 282 couples to the protruding body 270 via a frictional or snap-fit arrangement.
  • the weight 282 is similar to the weights 82, 182, except the weight 282 comprises a first portion 284 which is offset from a surrounding second portion 288 instead of an aperture 86, 186.
  • the first portion 284 fits over and presses against the protruding body 270, and the second portion 288 that is offset from and extends around the first portion 284 presses against the outer surface 274 of the club head 210.
  • the adjustable weighting system 266 includes multiple protruding bodies 270 and multiple weights 282 similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166. Additionally, in other embodiments the location of the protruding body or bodies 270 can differ from that illustrated similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166.
  • the adjustable weighting system 266 can comprise a plurality of weights 282.
  • the plurality of weights 282 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 282 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 282 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic.
  • the weights 282 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 282 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 282.
  • each of the weights 282 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass.
  • the weights 282 may vary in both volume and material from one another.
  • one of the structures labeled as 282 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 270A, B, C.
  • the weights 282 may vary between 0. l-50g.
  • one or more of the weights 282 may vary between 0-1 Og, one or more of the weights 282 may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights 282 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 282 may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights 282 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 282 may vary between 0-1 Og
  • a second weight 282 may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight 282 may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight 282 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 282 may vary between l-5g
  • a second and third weight 282 may vary between 5-30g.
  • a first and second weight 282 may vary between 1-lOg
  • a third and fourth weight 282 may vary between 5-25g.
  • a first weight 282 can have a mass of 8.5 grams
  • a second and third weight 282 each can have a mass of 1.5 grams.
  • a first weight 282 can have a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 282 each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 282 can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 282 each can have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 282 can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight 282 (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight 282) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight 282 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights 282 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0. l-50g.
  • the adjustable weighting system 266 of golf club head 210 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 266 of golf club head 210 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 210 having the adjustable weighting system 266 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 11-13 illustrate a club head 310 having a club head body 314.
  • the club head 310 includes an adjustable weighting system 366 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 310 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 366 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 310 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 366. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 366 ensures that shifts in the club head 310 CG occur mainly in a heel end 322 to toe end 318 direction keeping the overall club head 310 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weight system 366 can comprise a recessed portion 380.
  • the recessed portion 380 comprises a recessed surface 381.
  • the recessed surface 381 can include at least one discrete attachment location.
  • the at least one discrete attachment location can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the recessed portion 381 includes one discrete attachment location.
  • the discrete attachment location comprises a feature in the form of a protruding body 370.
  • the protruding body 370 is a rib extending perpendicularly from the recessed surface 381 within the recessed portion 380.
  • the protruding body 370 can comprise a weight 382.
  • the recessed portion 380 comprises a back wall 393, a front edge 395, a first edge 392, and second edge 394.
  • the recessed portion 380 extends across a portion of the sole 330 between the center and the heel end 322 following the contour of the trailing edge 373 of the club head 310.
  • the recessed portion 380 can extend across any portion of the sole 330 of club head 310.
  • the recessed portion 380 can follow the contour of the trailing edge 372 in a curvilinear manner or the recessed portion 380 can extend in a linear manner across the club head 310.
  • the recessed portion 380 can exist on the sole 330, the trailing edge 372, the crown 326 or top portion, the heel end 322, or the toe end 324 of the club head 310.
  • the recessed surface 381 is tapered from a shallowest part of the recessed portion at the first edge 392 to the deepest part of the recessed portion at the back wall 393.
  • the recessed portion 380 can have a constant depth, such that the recessed surface 380 extends offset and substantially parallel to the sole 330 of the club head 310.
  • the recessed portion 380 has a depth of 0.2 inches offset from the sole 330 of the club head 10.
  • the recessed portion 380 can have a depth of 0.05 to 1 inches offset from the sole 330 of the club head 310.
  • the recessed portion 380 can have a depth of 0.05 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.8 to 0.9, or 0.9 to 1 inches offset from the sole 30 of the club head 310.
  • the recessed portion 380 can be positioned at any location on the club head 310.
  • the adjustable weighting system 366 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266.
  • the adjustable weighting system 366 includes at least one protruding body 370 (FIG. 11) that receives a weight 382 (FIGS. 12 and 13).
  • the adjustable weighting system 366 includes just a single protruding body 370, although other embodiments include more than one protruding body 370.
  • the protruding body 370 defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 382 to the club head 310.
  • the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion 380.
  • the protruding body 370 may be of any shape and any configuration such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding body 370 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights, creating a low profile weighting system).
  • the protruding body 370 is a rib positioned within a recessed portion 380 of the club head 310 along a sole or bottom 330 of the club head 310.
  • the protruding body 370 extends outwardly from the recessed surface 381, and entirely across the recessed portion 380, from the first edge 392 of the recessed portion 380 to the second edge 394 of the recessed portion 380. However, in other embodiments the protruding body 370 extends only partially across the recessed portion 380. For example, in some embodiments the protruding body 370 does not contact the first edge 392 or the second edge 394, and is generally isolated within the recessed portion 380.
  • the protruding body 370 includes a slot 396 configured to receive a portion of the weight 382.
  • the slot 396 is located generally centrally within the protruding body 370 between the first edge 392 and the second edge 394. In other embodiments the slot 396 is located at another location along the protruding body 370.
  • the slot 396 comprises a rectangular shape. In other emboidments, the slot 396 can comprise a circular, triangular, polygonal, trapezoidal or any other suitable shape. Futher, the slot 396 extends through the entire depth of the protruding body 370, measured as the distance from the recessed surface 381 to the top of the protruding body 370.
  • the slot 396 can extend through a portion of the depth of the protruding body 370.
  • the slot 396 can extend 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%), or 100%) of the depth of the protruding body 370.
  • the protruding body 370 can include more than one slot 396.
  • the weight 382 includes a first portion 402 and a second portion 404.
  • the first portion 402 and the second portion 404 are separated by a gap and connected only by a post 398.
  • the gap between the first portion 402 and the second portion 404 is configured to receive the protruding body 370.
  • the first portion 402 and the second portion 404 slide into the recessed portion 380 of the club head 310 on either side of the protruding body 370 when the weight 382 is coupled to the protruding body 370.
  • the post 398 is configured to fit within the slot 396 when the first portion 402 and second portion 404 are positioned on either side of the protruding body 370.
  • the post 398 can be rectangular, circular, triangular, polygonal, trapezoidal or any other suitable shape corresponding with the slot 396. Illustrated in FIGS. 12 and 13, is the weight 382 including the post 398 that is sized and shaped to fit into the slot 396 (e.g., in a snap-fit arrangement), to secure the weight 382 onto the protruding body 370.
  • the protruding body 370 receives more than one weight 382 (e.g., by use of more than one slot 396).
  • the adjustable weighting system 366 includes more than one protruding body 370, each of which receives one or more weights 382.
  • the adjustable weighting system 366 can comprise a plurality of weights 3823.
  • the plurality of weights 382 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 382 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 382 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic.
  • the weights 382 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 382 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 382.
  • each of the weights 382 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass.
  • the weights 382 may vary in both volume and material from one another.
  • one of the structures labeled as 382 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 370A, B, C.
  • the weights 382 may vary between 0. l-50g.
  • one or more of the weights 382 may vary between 0-1 Og, one or more of the weights 382 may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights 382 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 382 may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights 382 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 382 may vary between 0-1 Og
  • a second weight 382 may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight 382 may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight 382 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 382 may vary between l-5g, and a second and third weight 382 may vary between 5-30g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 382 may vary between 1-1 Og, and a third and fourth weight 382, may vary between 5-25g. In some embodiments, a first weight 382 can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 382 each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 382 can have a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 382 each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 382 can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 382 each can have a mass of 0.75 grams.
  • a first weight 382 can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight 382 (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight 382) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, or 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight 382 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights 382 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0. l-50g.
  • the adjustable weighting system 366 of golf club head 310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 366 of golf club head 310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 310 having the adjustable weighting system 366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 14 and 15 illustrate a club head 410 having a club head body 414.
  • the club head 410 includes an adjustable weighting system 466 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 410 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 466 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 410 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 466.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 466 ensures that shifts in the club head 410 CG occur mainly in a heel end 422 to toe end 418 direction keeping the overall club head 410 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 466 can comprise a recessed portion 480.
  • the recessed portion 480 comprises a recessed surface 481.
  • the recessed surface 481 can include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 366 comprises a recessed surface 381 comprising three discrete attachment locations. Each discrete attachment location comprises a feature in the form of a protruding body 470A, B, C. Further, the protruding body 370 can comprise a weight 382.
  • the recessed surface 481 defines a groove, channel, and/or recessed track that extends along a sole or bottom 430 of the club head 410, adjacent a trailing edge 472, and extends generally in an arcuate configuration from the toe or toe end 418 to the heel or heel end 422.
  • the recessed portion 480 is similar to the recessed portion 380, except it is positioned adjacent the trailing edge 474.
  • the recessed portion 480 comprises a first edge 492 near the heel end 422, a second edge 494 near the toe end 422, a back wall 493 near the trailing edge 472, a wall 491 opposite the back wall 493, and a recessed surface 481 that forms part of an overall outer surface 474 of the club head 410.
  • the recessed portion 480 further comprises a segment 483 of the recessed surface 481 that extends inwardly toward a center of the club head 410.
  • the segment 483 extends along the sole 430 away from the back wall 493 or trailing edge 472 at location between the first edge 492 and the second edge 494 of the recessed portion 480.
  • the segment 483 provides an enlarged area within which to couple, for example, a larger weight to a protruding body 470C positioned adjacent to the segment 483, than to the first and second protruding bodies 470A, B positioned near the toe and heel ends 418, 422 of the club head 410.
  • the segment 483 tapers from the recessed surface 481 to the sole 430 of the club head 410.
  • the tapered segment 483 creates a ramp type surface extending away from the front edge 493 towards the center of the sole 430.
  • the segment 483 can extend for a length of 0.1 to 2 inches away from the front edge 493 towards the center of the sole 430.
  • the segment 483 can extend 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.8 to 1.2, 1.0 to 1.4, 1.2 to 1.6, 1.4 to 1.8, or 1.6 or 2.0 inches away from the front edge 493 towards the center of the sole 430.
  • the recessed portion 480 comprises a length measured as the distance between the first edge 492 and the second edge 49. In some embodiments, the recessed portion 480 can have a length which extends the majority of the distance from the heel end 422 to the toe end 424. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 480 can have a length which extends a portion of the way between the heel end 422 and the toe end 424. Further, in the illustrated embodiment, the recessed portion 480 has a depth of 0.2 inches measured as the distance the recessed surface 481 is offset from the sole 430 of the club head 410. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 480 can have a depth of 0.05 to 1 inches offset from the sole 430 of the club head 410.
  • the recessed portion 480 can have a depth of 0.05 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.8 to 0.9, or 0.9 to 1 inches offset from the sole 430 of the club head 410.
  • the adjustable weighting system 466 is similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166.
  • the adjustable weighting system 466 includes at least one protruding body 470 that receives a weight.
  • the weights (not shown) can be similar in size, shape and mass to the weight 82 described above.
  • the adjustable weighting system 466 includes three protruding bodies 470A, B, C. Each protruding body 470A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 482 to the club head 410. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 466 can include 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 protruding bodies.
  • the protruding bodies 470 may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 470A,B,C(as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 470A, B, C are each generally cylindrical in shape.
  • the protruding bodies 470A, B, C have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 470A, B, C are positioned within the recessed portion 480 of the club head 410.
  • the protruding bodies 470A, B, C extend outwardly from the outer surface 474.
  • One of the protruding bodies 470A extends from the recessed surface 481 generally at the toe or toe end 418
  • one of the protruding bodies 470C extends from the recessed surface 481 generally at the heel or heel end 422
  • one of the protruding bodies 470B extends from the recessed surface 481 generally between the toe or toe end 418 and the heel or heel end 422.
  • any number of protruding bodies 470 can extends outwardly from any location along the outer surface 474.
  • the protruding bodies 474 can be spaced equidistance from one another.
  • the protruding bodies 474 can be spaced a varying distance from one another.
  • the protruding bodies 474 can be spaced at any point between the first edge 492 and the second edge 494 spaced by a distance of 0.1 to 3 inches between one another.
  • the protruding bodies 474 can be spaced at any point between the first edge 492 and the second edge 494 spaced by a distance of 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 1.0, 0.7 to 1.5, 1.0 to 2.0, 1.5 to 2.5, or 2.0 to 3.0 inches between one another. In some
  • the protruding bodies 470 include exterior threads, and the corresponding weights that couple to the protruding bodies 470 include interior threads (e.g., in apertures of the weights similar to the weights 82 described above), such that the weights are threadably coupled to the protruding bodies 470.
  • the weights are coupled to the protruding bodies 470 with friction fits, with snap-fit mechanisms, with set screws positioned within threaded inner surfaces of the protruding bodies 470, or with other structures.
  • each of the weights can have the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight may have a greater volume than the remaining weights. In some embodiments, each of the weights may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass.
  • the weights may vary in both volume and material from one another.
  • one of the weights can be a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 470 A, B, C.
  • the weights may vary between 0.1-50g.
  • one or more of the weights may vary between 0-1 Og, one or more of the weights may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights may vary between 40- 50g.
  • a first weight may vary between 0-1 Og
  • a second weight may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight may vary between l-5g, and a second and third weight may vary between 5-30g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight may vary between 1-lOg, and a third and fourth weight, may vary between 5-25g. In some embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight each can have a mass of 0.75 grams.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, or 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1 -50g.
  • the weights may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 470A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 410 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias.
  • a heavier weight is positioned on the third protruding body 470B, located between the toe or toe end 418 and the heel or heel end 422, while lighter weights are positioned on the first and second protruding bodies 470A, C near the toe or toe end 418 and the heel or heel end 422.
  • aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 6334 of the club head 410.
  • a heavier weight is positioned on the second protruding body 470C near the heel or heel end 422, while lighter weights are positioned on the first protruding body 470A near the toe or toe end 418 and on the third protruding body 470B that is located between the toe or toe end 418 and the heel or heel end 422.
  • the aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 422 of the club head 410.
  • a heavier weight is positioned on the first protruding body 470 A near the toe or toe end 418, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding body second 470C near the heel or heel end 422 and on the third protruding body 470B that is located between the toe or toe end 418 and the heel or heel end 422.
  • the aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 418 of the club head 410.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 470A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 470A, B, C.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 470 A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 470A, B, C has its own corresponding weight or set of weights.
  • the adjustable weighting system 466 of golf club head 410 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 466 of golf club head 410 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 410 having the adjustable weighting system 466 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 16 and 17 illustrate a club head 510 having a club head body 514.
  • the club head 510 includes an adjustable weighting system 566 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 510 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 566 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 510 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 566.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 566 ensures that shifts in the club head 510 CG occur mainly in a heel end 522 to toe end 518 direction keeping the overall club head 510 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 566 can comprise a recessed portion 580.
  • the recessed portion 580 comprises a recessed surface 581.
  • the recessed surface 581 can include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 566 comprises a recessed surface 581 including three discrete attachment locations.
  • the discrete attachment locations each comprise a feature in the form of a protruding body 570A, B, C. Further, the protruding bodies 570A, B, C can comprise a weight 582.
  • the recessed portion 580 is generally a groove, channel, and/or recessed track that extends along the sole or bottom 530, adjacent a trailing edge 572 of the club head 510, and extends generally in an arcuate configuration from the toe or toe end 518 to the heel or heel end 522. Further, the recessed portion 580 comprises a segment 583 similar to the segment 483 of the recess 580.
  • one of the protruding bodies 570A is positioned generally at the toe or toe end 518
  • one of the protruding bodies 570C is positioned generally at the heel or heel end 522
  • the other protruding body 570B is positioned between the toe or toe end 518 and the heel or heel end 522.
  • Each protruding body 570A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 582 to the club head 510.
  • the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the protruding bodies 570 may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 570 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 570 are each generally cylindrical in shape.
  • the protruding bodies 570 have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or any other shapes.
  • the adjustable weighting system 566 includes a weight 582 that is positioned on the club head 510 adjacent to the protruding body 570 such that the weight 582 forms a portion of a wall that defines the recessed portion 580.
  • the weight 582 can be permanently coupled (e.g. glued, epoxied, welded, brazed, co-molded) to the club head 510.
  • the weight 582 is coupled to the club head 510 using another protruding body 570 (e.g., a fourth protruding body 570D) positioned within the segment 583.
  • the weight 582 can have any shape.
  • the weight 582 can be rectangular, circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal, or any other suitable shape.
  • the weight 582 is heavier than the movable weights configured to couple with the protruding bodies 570A, B, C.
  • the weight 582 has a mass of 20g.
  • the weight 582 can have a mass between 0.5 to 50g.
  • the weight 582 can have a mass between 0.5 to 2g, 1 to 5g, 3 to 7g, 5 to lOg, 7 to 12g, 10 to 15g, 15 to 20g, 20 to 25g, or 25 to 30g.
  • the movable weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 570A,B,C can be similar in mass, size, shape, and volume to the weight 82 described above.
  • the adjustable weighting system 566 of golf club head 510 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 566 of golf club head 510 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 510 having the adjustable weighting system 566 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates a club head 610 having a club head body 614.
  • the club head 610 includes an adjustable weighting system 666 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 610 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 666 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 610 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 666. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 666 ensures that shifts in the club head 610 CG occur mainly in a heel end 622 to toe end 618 direction keeping the overall club head 610 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weight system 666 can comprise a recessed portion 680.
  • the recessed portion 680 can comprise a plurality of recessed surfaces 681 and a wall 683.
  • the recessed surfaces 681 and/or the wall 683 can include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the wall 683 of the recessed portion 683 comprises three discrete attachment locations.
  • Each discrete attachment location comprises a feature in the form of a protruding body 670 A, B, C.
  • the protruding bodies 670A, B, C can comprise a weight.
  • the recessed portion 680 comprises three recessed surfaces 681 A, B, C. [00200] Referring again to FIG. 18, in the illustrated embodiment, the recessed portion 680 includes a wall 683, a first edge 692 near the heel end 622 and a second edge 694 near the toe end 618. Further, the recessed portion 680 includes three distinct recessed surfaces 681 A, B, C. The recessed surfaces 681 A, B, C are disposed adjacent to each other along a sole or bottom 630 of the club head 610.
  • Each recessed surface 681 A, B, C can be disposed at a various depth to the recessed surface 681 A, B, C adjacent to it, which each form part of an overall outer surface 674 of the club head 610.
  • the recessed surfaces 681 are separated from a remainder of the sole or bottom 630 by the wall 693.
  • the recessed surfaces 681 A, B, C have a width defined as the distance they extend between the trailing edge 672 of the club head 610 and the wall 483.
  • each of the recessed surface 681 A, B, C share a wall 483 and have a width of 1 inch.
  • the recessed surfaces 681 A, B, C can have a width between 0.1 to 3 inches.
  • the width of the recessed surfaces 681A, B, C can be between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 1.0, 0.7 to 1.3, 1.0 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, 1.5 to 2.0, 1.7 to 2.3, 2 to 2.5, 2.3 to 2.7, or 2.5 to 3 inches. Further, in other words, in other words, in other words, in other words, in other words, in other words, in other words, in other words, in other words, in other dimensions of the recessed surfaces 681A, B, C can be between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 1.0, 0.7 to 1.3, 1.0 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, 1.5 to 2.0, 1.7 to 2.3, 2 to 2.5, 2.3 to 2.7, or 2.5 to 3 inches. Further, in other suitable width of the recessed surfaces 681A, B, C can be between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 1.0, 0.7 to 1.3, 1.0 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, 1.5 to 2.0, 1.7 to 2.3, 2 to 2.5, 2.3 to 2.7, or
  • the recessed surfaces 681 A, B, C can each comprise their own first wall 693 and therefore have differing widths.
  • the recessed surfaces 681 A, B, C are positioned adjacent each other, such that a first recessed surface 681A is positioned proximate the second edge 694 near the toe end 618, a second recessed surface 681C is positioned proximate the first edge 694 near the heel end 622, and a third recessed surface 68 IB is positioned between the first edge 692 near the heel end 622 and the second edge 694 near the toe end 618.
  • the three recessed surfaces 681 A, B, C comprise varying depths measured as the distance offset from the sole 630 of the club head 610.
  • the recessed surface 681B is raised or has a shallower depth compared to the recessed surfaces 681 A, C.
  • any of the recessed surfaces 681 A, B, C can be raised or have a shallower depth than any of the other recessed surface 681 A, B, C.
  • the middle recessed surface 68 IB can be lower than the recessed surfaces 681 A, C proximate the heel and toe ends 618, 622 of the club head 610.
  • the recessed surface 681A, the recessed surface 681B, and recessed surface 681C can have varying depths relative the sole 630 of the club head 610.
  • the recessed surfaces 681 A, B, C can have depths of 0.05 to 1 inches offset from the sole 630.
  • the recessed surfaces 681A, B, C can have depths of 0.05 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.8 to 0.9, or 0.9 to 1 inches offset from the sole 630.
  • recessed surfaces 681 A, C proximate the toe end 618 and the heel end 622 of the club head 610 can be tapered towards the trailing edge 672.
  • the recessed surfaces 681 A, C can extend generally parallel to the sole 630 towards the trailing edge 672. In other embodiments, any of the recessed surfaces 681681 A, B, C can taper towards the trailing edge 672 and any of the remaining recessed surfaces 681681A,B,C can extend substantially parallel to the sole 630 surface. Further, in other embodiments, the recessed portion 680 can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or any other number of recessed surfaces 681.
  • the adjustable weight system 666 is similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566.
  • the adjustable weighting system 666 includes at least one protruding body 670 that receives a weight.
  • the weight (not shown) can be similar to the weight 82, described above.
  • the adjustable weighting system 666 includes three protruding bodies 670A,B,C each defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 682 to the club head 610.
  • the adjustable weighting system 666 can include more or less that three protruding bodies 670.
  • the protruding bodies 670A, B, C can be similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, , 470, 570 described above and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 670A, B, C (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 670 are each generally cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 670 have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or any other shapes.
  • protruding bodies 670A, B, C extend outwardly from the outer surface 674.
  • protruding bodies 670A, B, C extend outward from the wall 694 in a direction generally towards the trailing edge 672.
  • the protruding bodies 670 A, B, C can extend outward from the recessed surface 681.
  • one of the protruding bodies 670A is positioned generally at the recessed surface 681 A or toe end 618 and extends from the wall 683
  • one of the protruding bodies 670C is positioned generally at the recessed surface 681C or heel end 622 and extends from the wall 683
  • the other protruding body 670B is positioned between the recessed surface681 Aor toe end 618 and the recessed surface 681C or heel end 622 and extends from the wall 683.
  • the protruding bodies 674 can be spaced equidistance from one another. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 674 can be spaced a varying distance from one another. For example, the protruding bodies 674 can be spaced at any point between the first edge 692 and the second edge 694 spaced by a distance of 0.1 to 3 inches between one another. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 674 can be spaced at any point between the first edge 692 and the second edge 694 spaced by a distance of 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 1.0, 0.7 to 1.5, 1.0 to 2.0, 1.5 to 2.5, or 2.0 to 3.0 inches between one another.
  • each of the weights can have the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight may have a greater volume than the remaining weights. In some embodiments, each of the weights may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass.
  • the weights may vary in both volume and material from one another.
  • one of the protruding bodies 670A, B, C can comprise a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 670A, B, C.
  • the weights may vary between 0.1-50g.
  • one or more of the weights may vary between 0-1 Og, one or more of the weights may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight may vary between 0-1 Og
  • a second weight may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight may vary between l-5g
  • a second and third weight may vary between 5-30g.
  • a first and second weight may vary between 1-lOg
  • a third and fourth weight may vary between 5-25g.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 8.5 grams
  • a second and third weight each can have a mass of 1.5 grams.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight each can have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, or 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10, 1 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50g.
  • the weights may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 670A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 610 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias.
  • a heavier weight is positioned on the third protruding body 670B, located between the toe or toe end 618 and the heel or heel end 622, while lighter weights are positioned on the first and second protruding bodies 670A, C near the toe or toe end 618 and the heel or heel end 622.
  • aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 6334 of the club head 610.
  • a heavier weight is positioned on the second protruding body 670C near the heel or heel end 622, while lighter weights are positioned on the first protruding body 670A near the toe or toe end 618 and on the third protruding body 670B that is located between the toe or toe end 618 and the heel or heel end 622.
  • the aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 622 of the club head 610.
  • a heavier weight is positioned on the first protruding body 670 A near the toe or toe end 618, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding body second 670C near the heel or heel end 622 and on the third protruding body 670B that is located between the toe or toe end 618 and the heel or heel end 622.
  • the aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 618 of the club head 610.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 670A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 670 A, B, C.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 670A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 670A, B, C has its own corresponding weight or set of weights.
  • the adjustable weighting system 666 of golf club head 610 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 666 of golf club head 610 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 610 having the adjustable weighting system 666 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above
  • FIGS. 19 and 20 illustrate a club head 710 having a club head body 714.
  • the club head 710 includes an adjustable weighting system 766 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 710 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 766 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 710 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 766.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 766 ensures that shifts in the club head 710 CG occur mainly in a heel end 722 to toe end 718 direction keeping the overall club head 710 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weight system 766 can comprise an extended portion 750.
  • the extended portion 750 comprises at least one recessed portion 780.
  • the recessed portion 780 comprises a recessed surface 781.
  • the recessed surface 781 can include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weight system 766 comprises two recessed portions 780 A, B having two recessed surfaces 781 A, 78 IB.
  • the two recessed surfaces 781 A, B including a total of four discrete attachment locations.
  • the discrete attachment locations can comprise any of the features mentioned in the list above.
  • the features 770 are illustrated by a circle on the recessed surfaces 781 A, 78 IB.
  • the extended portion 750 is protruded outward from the sole 730 and extends from a first end 751 near the center of the sole 730 to a second end 752 at or near the trailing edge 772.
  • the surface of the extended portion 750 forming a part of the overall outer surface 774 of the club head 710.
  • the extended portion 750 can have a first end 751 positioned at any point between the trailing edge 772 and the center of the sole 730.
  • the extended portion 750 can have a second end 752 positioned at any point between the first end 751 and the trailing edge 772.
  • the extended portion 750 comprises a width measured as the distance it extends from a heel 722 to a toe 718 direction.
  • the extended portion 750 has a width which increases from near the center of the sole 730 to the trailing edge 772 of the club head 710.
  • the width of the extended portion 750 can increase, decrease or remain constant from the first end 751 to the second end 752.
  • the extended portion 750 protrudes outwards from the sole 730 at a height measured at the distance from the sole 730 to the top surface 755 of the extended portion 750. In the illustrated embodiment, the height of the extended portion 750 increases from the first end 751 to the second end 752.
  • the height of the extended portion 750 can increase, decrease or remain the same from the first end 751 to the second end 752 of the extended portion 750.
  • the extended portion 750 can have a height between 0.05 to 1 inches.
  • the height of the extended portion 750 can be between 0.05 to 0.15, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.15 to 0.25, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.25 to 0.35, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.35 to 0.45, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.45 to 0.55, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.55 to 0.65, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.65 to 0.75, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.75 to 0.85, 0.8 to 0.9, 0.85 to 0.95, or 0.9 to 1.0 inches.
  • the adjustable weighting system 766 includes two recessed portion 780A, B each having a recessed surface 781 A, B.
  • the recessed portions 780A, B are disposed both disposed in the first end 751 of the extended portion 750.
  • Each recessed surface 781 A, B comprises a wall 783 A,B defining a perimeter of the recessed portion 780A,B and separating the recessed surface 781 A, B from the surface of the extended portion 750.
  • the recessed portion 780 A, B are generally adjacent to each other, such that a first recessed surface 781 A faces the trailing edge 772 of the club head 710, and a second recessed surface 782B is substantially perpendicular with the first recessed surface 781 A and substantially parallel with the top surface 755 of the extended portion 750.
  • the recessed portion 780 and thus the recessed surfaces 781 can be positioned in any position along the extended portion 750.
  • each recessed portion 780A, B comprises a depth measured as the distance the recessed surface 781 A, B is offset from the surface of the extended portion 750.
  • the recessed surfaces 781 A, B can have depths of 0.05 to 1 inches.
  • the recessed surfaces 781 A, B can have depths of 0.05 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.8 to 0.9, or 0.9 to 1 inches.
  • the features 770 will be referred to as protruding bodies 770, however the feature 770 can refer to any of the features 770 mentioned above.
  • the adjustable weight system 766 is similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666.
  • the adjustable weighting system 766 includes at least one protruding body 770 that receives a weight.
  • the weight (not shown) can be similar to the weight 82, described above.
  • the adjustable weighting system 766 includes four protruding bodies 770A, B, C, D although other embodiments can include more or less that four protruding bodies 770.
  • Each protruding body 770A, B, C, D defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 782 to the club head 710.
  • the protruding bodies 770 are similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, 470, 570, 670 described above, and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 770 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 770 may be cylindrical in shape, have square cross- sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 770A, B, C, D extend outwardly from the outer surface 774. Three of the protruding bodies 770A, B, C are positioned on the recessed surface 781 A, and the fourth protruding body 770D is positioned on the other recessed surface 78 IB. More specifically, a first protruding body 770 A is positioned near the toe end 818, a second protruding body is positioned near the heel end 822, a third protruding body 770C is positioned between the toe and heel end 818, 822, a fourth protruding body 770D is positioned centered on the recessed surface 78 IB.
  • the protruding body or bodies 770A, B, C, D are positioned at different locations. As illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20, one of the protruding bodies 770D positioned on the recessed surface 78 IB is larger than the other protruding bodies 770A, B, C (as schematically illustrated by the larger circle).
  • the larger protruding body 770D may, for example, be coupled to a heavier swing weight to alter a center of gravity (CG) position and reduce of a moment of inertia (MOI), while the other protruding bodies 770A, B, C may, for example, may be coupled to smaller swing weights to affect ball flight path, depending upon a fade or draw bias.
  • the protruding bodies 770A, B, C, D are all of equal size, but one of the protruding bodies 770A, B, C, D is coupled to a heavier weight than the other protruding bodies 770A, B, C, D. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 770A, B, C, D are the same size and are coupled to weights having the same mass. Further, the protruding bodies 770A, B, C, D may be located at any position within the recessed portions 780A,B. In some embodiments, the protruding bodies 770A, B, C, D may be positioned equidistance between one another within the recessed portion 780 A, B.
  • the protruding bodies 770 A, B, C, D may be positioned at a variable distance between one another within the recessed portion 780 A, B.
  • the weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 770A,B, C, D can have the same mass, size, shape as the weights 82 described above. Further, shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 770A, B, C can have the same effects as discussed in previous embodiments. However, shifting a heavier weight to the protruding body 770D can further shift the club head CG lower and further back on the club head 710, affecting the spin imparted on the golf ball.
  • the adjustable weighting system 766 of golf club head 710 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 766 of golf club head 710 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 710 having the adjustable weighting system 766 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 21 and 22 illustrate a club head 810 having a club head body 814.
  • the club head 810 includes an adjustable weighting system 866 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 810 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 866 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 810 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 866.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 866 ensures that shifts in the club head 810 CG occur mainly in a heel end 822 to toe end 818 direction keeping the overall club head 810 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weight system 866 can comprise an extended portion 850 having a recessed portion 880.
  • the recessed portion 880 is a portion of the adjustable weight system 866.
  • the recessed surface 881 can include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 866 comprises a recessed portion 880 having two recessed surfaces 881A, 881B.
  • the two recessed surfaces 881A, B including a total of six discrete attachment locations.
  • the discrete attachment locations can comprise any of the features mentioned in the list above.
  • the features 870A, B, C, D, E, F are illustrated by a circle on the recessed surfaces 881 A, 88 IB.
  • the features 870A, B, C, D, E, F are further configured to comprise at least one weight (not shown).
  • the extended portion 850 extends from a first end 851 on the sole 830 to a second end 852 at or near the trailing edge 872.
  • the extended portion 850 follows the contour of the trailing edge 872 from the heel end 822 to the toe end 818 of the club head 810.
  • the surface of the extended portion 850 forming a part of the overall surface 874 of the club head 810.
  • the extended portion 850 has a length measured as the distance the first end 851 on the sole 830 to the second end 852 at or near the trailing edge 872. In many embodiments, the extended portion 850 can have a length of .1 to 2 inches.
  • the extended portion 850 can have a length of 0.1 to .5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches. Additionally, the extended portion 850 protrudes outwards from the sole 830 at a height measured at the distance from the sole 830 to a top surface 855 of the extended portion 850. In the illustrated embodiment, the height of the extended portion 850 increases from the first end 851 to the second end 852. In other embodiments, the height of the extended portion 850 can increase, decrease or remain the same from the first end 851 to the second end 852 of the extended portion 850.
  • the extended portion 850 can have a height between 0.05 to 1 inches.
  • the height of the extended portion 850 can be between 0.05 to 0.15, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.15 to 0.25, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.25 to 0.35, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.35 to 0.45, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.45 to 0.55, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.55 to 0.65, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.65 to 0.75, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.75 to 0.85, 0.8 to 0.9, 0.85 to 0.95, or 0.9 to 1.0 inches.
  • the adjustable weighting system 866 comprises two recessed portions 880A, B each having a recessed surface 881 A, B. Further, each recessed portion 880A, B comprises a wall 883 A, B defining a perimeter of the recessed portion 880A, B and separating the recessed surfaces 881 A, B from the surface 874 of the club head 810.
  • the recessed surface 881A, B are positioned adjacent each other, however alternative to the recessed surfaces 781 A, B of the recessed portions 780A,B, the recessed surfaces 881 A, B face the same direction substantially parallel with the top surface 855 of the extended portion 850.
  • a first one of the recessed portions 880A is positioned adjacent the trailing edge 872 and has a width which extends from the heel end 822 to the toe end 818 of the club head 820. Further, a second one of the recessed portions 880B is offset from the trailing edge by the width of the first recessed portion 880A and is positioned between the heel end 822 and toe end 818 of the club head 810. Further, the recessed portions 880A, B have a depth measured as the distance the recessed surface 881 A, B is offset from the outer surface 874. In the illustrated embodiment, the depth of the recessed surface 881 A is greater than the depth of the recessed surface 88 IB.
  • the depth of the recessed surface 881 A can be less than the depth of the recessed surface 881B.
  • the recessed surfaces 881 A, B can have depths of 0.05 to 1 inches.
  • the recessed surfaces 881 A, B can have depths of 0.05 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.8 to 0.9, or 0.9 to 1 inches.
  • the adjustable weight system 866 can have any number of recessed portions 880.
  • the adjustable weight system 866 can have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 recessed portions 880.
  • the features 870 will be referred to as protruding bodies 870, however the feature 870 can refer to any of the features 870 mentioned above.
  • the adjustable weight system 866 is similar to the adjustable weighting system 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766.
  • the adjustable weighting system 866 includes at least one protruding body 880 (illustrated schematically by the circles marked on the figures) that receives a weight.
  • the weight (not shown) can be similar to the weights 82, described above.
  • the adjustable weighting system 866 includes six protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E, F.
  • the adjustable weight system 866 can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 870 and the recessed portions 880A, B can be positioned on any outer surface 874 of the club head 810.
  • the protruding bodies 870 can be similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, , 470, 570, 670, 770 and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 870 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 870 may be cylindrical in shape, have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E, F extend outwardly from the recessed surfaces 881 A, B.
  • a first protruding body 870A is positioned generally at the toe end 818
  • a second protruding body 870E is positioned generally at the heel end 822
  • a third protruding body 870C is positioned between the toe end 818 and the heel end 822
  • a fourth protruding body 870B is positioned between the first protruding body 870A and the third protruding body 870C
  • a fifth protruding body is positioned between the third protruding body 870C and the second protruding body 870E
  • a sixth protruding body 870F is positioned centered on the recessed surface 88 IB.
  • Each protruding body 870A, B, C, D, E, F defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 882 to the club head 810.
  • the protruding body or bodies 870A, B, C, D, E, F are positioned at different locations. As illustrated in FIGS. 21 and 22, the protruding body 870F on the raised recess surface 88 IB is larger than the other protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E.
  • the larger protruding body 870F may, for example, be used to couple to a heavier weight than the other protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E (e.g., to a heavier swing weight).
  • the protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E, F are all of equal size, but one of the protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E, F is coupled to a heavier weight than the other protruding bodies 870 A, B, C, D, E, F.
  • the protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E, F are the same size and are coupled to weights having the same mass.
  • the protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E, F may be located at any position within the recessed portion 880A, B. In some embodiments, the protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E, F may be positioned equidistance between one another within the recessed portion 880A, B. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E, F may be positioned at a variable distance between one another within the recessed portion 880A, B.
  • the weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D can have the same mass, size, shape as the weights 82 described above.
  • shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, in a toe to heel manner can have the same effects as discussed in previous embodiments (Shifting the CG from the heel end 922 to the toe end 918).
  • shifting a heavier weight to the protruding body 870E can further shift the club head CG lower and forward on the club head 810, affecting the spin imparted on the golf ball.
  • the adjustable weighting system 866 of golf club head 810 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 866 of golf club head 810 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 810 having the adjustable weighting system 866 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 23 and 24 illustrate a club head 910 having a club head body 914.
  • the club head 910 includes an adjustable weighting system 966 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 910 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 966 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 910 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 966.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 966 ensures that shifts in the club head 910 CG occur mainly in a heel end 922 to toe end 918 direction keeping the overall club head 910 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weight system 966 can comprise a recessed portion 980.
  • the recessed portion 980 comprises a recessed surface 981, which can include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weight system 966 comprises a recessed surface including 6 discrete attachment locations.
  • the discrete attachment locations each having a feature in the form of a protruding bodies 970. Further, the protruding bodies 970 are configured to receive a weight.
  • the recessed portion 980 includes a wall 983 that defines a perimeter around the recessed surface 981, and separates the recessed surface 981 from a remainder of the outer surface 974 or sole 930.
  • the recessed surface 981 has a first portion 985 that extends from an intersection region 998 toward a toe or toe end 918 of the club head 910, a second portion 987 that extends from the intersection region 998 toward to a heel or heel end 922 of the club head 910, and a third portion 989 that extends generally inwardly from the intersection region 998 toward a center of the sole or bottom 930.
  • the first and second portions 985, 987 extend 3 inches from the center of the intersection region 998, while the third portion 998 extends 1.5 inches from the center of the intersection region 998.
  • the first, second and third portions 985, 987, 989 can extend an equal distance from the center of the intersection region 998.
  • the first, second and third portion 985, 987, 989 can all extend different distances from the center of the intersection region 998.
  • the first, second and third portions 985, 987, 989 can extend between 0.5 to 4 inches from the center of the intersection region 998.
  • the first, second and third portions 985, 987, 989 can extend between 0.5 to 1.0, 0.75 to 1.25, 1.0 to 1.5, 1.25 to 1.75, 1.5 to 2.0, 1.75 to 2.25, 2.0 to 2.5, 2.25 to 2.75, 2.5 to 3.0, 2.75 to 3.25, 3.0 to 3.5, 3.25 to 3.75, or 3.5 to 4.0 inches from the center of the intersection region 998.
  • the recessed portion 980 has a depth measured as the distance from the outer surface 974 or sole 930 to the recessed surface 981. In the illustrated embodiment, the recessed surface 981 has a constant depth across all of the first, second, and third portions 985, 957,959 of the recessed surface 981.
  • the recessed surface 981 can have a depth of between 0.05 to 1 inches.
  • the recessed surface 981 can have depth of 0.05 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.8 to 0.9, or 0.9 to 1 inches.
  • the adjustable weighting system 966 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866.
  • the adjustable weighting system 966 includes at least one protruding body 970 that receives a weight.
  • the adjustable weighting system 966 includes six protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F.
  • the protruding bodies 970 are positioned within a recessed portion 980 of the club head 910 along a sole or bottom 930 of the club head 910.
  • the adjustable weighting system 966 can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 970.
  • the protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F are similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, 470, 570, 670, 770, 870 and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 970 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the weights (not shown) can be similar to the weight 82, described above.
  • the protruding bodies 970 may be cylindrical in shape, have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 970 extend outwardly from the outer surface 974 of the club head 910.
  • a first two of the protruding bodies 970A, B are positioned on the first portion 985
  • a second two of the protruding bodies 970A, B, D, E are positioned on the second portion 987
  • one of the protruding bodies 970Dis positioned on the third portion 989
  • the remaining protruding body 970Cis positioned on the intersecting region 998.
  • Each of the protruding bodies A, B, C, D, E, F defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 982 to the club head 910.
  • a first protruding body 970 A is positioned generally at the toe end 918
  • a second protruding body 970E is positioned generally at the heel end 922
  • a third protruding body 970C is positioned between the toe end 918 and the heel end 922
  • a fourth protruding body 970B is positioned on the first portion 985 between the first protruding body 970A and the third protruding body 970C
  • a fifth protruding body 970E is positioned on the second portion 987 between the third protruding body 970C and the second protruding body 970E
  • a sixth protruding body 970F is positioned at point nearest the face on the third portion 989.
  • the protruding body or bodies 970 are positioned at different locations.
  • the protruding body or bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F can be equally distributed across the first, second and third portion 985, 987, 989.
  • the protruding bodies can be more heavily distributed in the third region 989.
  • the protruding bodies 970 A, B, C, D, E, F can be separated by an equal distance between one another.
  • the distance between the protruding bodies 970 A, B, C, D, E, F can vary from protruding body 970 to protruding body 970. Further, as illustrated in FIGS.
  • the fifth protruding body 970E positioned at the intersection region 998 is larger than the other protruding bodies 970 A, B, C, D, F.
  • the larger protruding body 970E may, for example, be used to couple to a heavier weight than the other protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, F (e.g., to a heavier swing weight).
  • the protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F are all of equal size, but one of the protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F is coupled to a heavier weight than the other protruding bodies 970 A, B, C, D, E, F.
  • the protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F are all of equal size and each is coupled to a weight having a different mass than the other protruding bodies 970 A, B, C, D, E, F.
  • the protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F are all of equal size and are all coupled to weights having the same mass.
  • the weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F can have the same mass, size, and shape as the weights 82 described above.
  • shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, E in a toe to heel manner can have the same effects as discussed in previous embodiments (Shifting the CG from the heel end 922 to the toe end 918). Further, shifting a heavier weight to the protruding body 970D can shift the club head 910 CG towards the front of the club head 910 affecting the spin imparted on the ball.
  • the adjustable weighting system 966 of golf club head 910 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 966 of golf club head 910 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 910 having the adjustable weighting system 966 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 25 and 26 illustrate a club head 1010 having a club head body 1014.
  • the club head 1010 includes an adjustable weighting system 1066 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 1010 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1066 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 1010 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 1066.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 1066 ensures that shifts in the club head 1010 CG occur mainly in a heel end 1022 to toe end 1018 direction keeping the overall club head 1010 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weight system 1066 can comprise a recessed portion 1080 having a recessed surface 1081.
  • the recessed portion 1080 can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weight system 1066 includes a recessed portion 1080 including four discrete attachment locations.
  • the four discrete attachment locations each comprising a feature in the form of a protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1066 can comprise any number of protruding bodies 1070.
  • the protruding bodies 1070 can be configured to receive a weight.
  • the recessed portion 1080 is similar to the recessed portion 680, except the recessed portion 680 comprises only a single recessed surface 681.
  • the recessed portion 1080 includes a recessed surface 1081.
  • the recessed surface 1081 is disposed along a sole or bottom 1030 of the club head 1010, forming part of an overall outer surface 1074 of the club head 1010.
  • the recessed surface 1081 is disposed adjacent a trailing edge 1072 of the club head 1010.
  • the recessed surface 1081 is separated from a remainder of the outer surface 1074 or sole 1030 by a wall 1083, a first edge 1092 proximate the heel end 1022 of the club head 1010, and a second edge 1094 proximate a toe end 1028 of the club head 1010.
  • the recessed portion 1080 extends generally in an arcuate configuration from the second edge 1094 proximate the toe or toe end 1018 to the first edge 1092 proximate the heel or heel end 1022 of the club head 1010.
  • the recessed surface 1081 has a width defined as the distance it extends between the trailing edge 1072 of the club head 1010 and the wall 1093.
  • the recessed surface 1081 has a width of 1 inch. In other embodiments, the recessed surface 1081 can have a width between 0.1 to 3 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width of the recessed surface 1081 can be between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 1.0, 0.7 to 1.3, 1.0 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, 1.5 to 2.0, 1.7 to 2.3, 2 to 2.5, 2.3 to 2.7, or 2.5 to 3 inches. Further, the recessed surface 1081 comprises a depth measured as the distance between the recessed surface 1081 and the sole 1030 of the club head 1010. The recessed surface 1081 can have a depth of 0.05 to 1 inches.
  • the recessed surface 1081 can have a depth of 0.05 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.8 to 0.9, or 0.9 to 1 inches. Further, in the illustrated embodiment, the depth of the recessed surface 1081 tapers from the wall 1093 to the trailing edge 1072 of the club head 1010. In other embodiments, the recessed surface 1081 can extend generally parallel to the surface of the sole 1030 towards the trailing edge 672.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1066 can be similar to 66, 166, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1066 includes at least one protruding body 1070 that receives a weight.
  • the weight can be similar to the weight 82 described above.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1066 includes four protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D.
  • the protruding body 1070A,B,C,D can be similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, 470, 570, 670, 770, 870, 970 and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 10701070A, B, C, D (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 1070 may be cylindrical in shape, have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 1070 A, B, C, D extend outwardly from the outer surface 1074.
  • three of the protruding bodies 1070 A, B, C extend from the wall 1083 and a fourth protruding body 1070D extends from the recesses surface 1081.
  • a first protruding body 1070A is positioned generally at the toe or toe end 1018 and extends from the first wall 1083
  • a second protruding body 1070C is positioned generally at the heel or heel end 1022 and extends from the first wall 1083
  • a third protruding body 1070B is positioned between the toe or toe end 1018 and the heel or heel end 1022 and extends from the first wall 1083
  • a fourth protruding body 1070D is positioned generally between the toe end 1028 and the heel end 1022 and extends from the recessed surface 1081.
  • Each of the first, second and third protruding bodies 1070 extends from the first wall 1083 towards the trailing edge 1072.
  • each protruding body 1070 A, B, C, D defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 1010.
  • the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D can be spaced equidistance from one another.
  • the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D can be spaced a varying distance from one another.
  • the protruding bodies 1070 A, B, C, D can be located at any point between the first edge 1092 and the second edge 1094 spaced by a distance of 0.1 to 3 inches between one another.
  • the protruding bodies 1070 A, B, C, D can be located at any point between the first edge 1092 and the second edge 1094 spaced by a distance of 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 1.0, 0.7 to 1.5, 1.0 to 2.0, 1.5 to 2.5, or 2.0 to 3.0 inches between one another.
  • one of the protruding bodies 1070 A, B, C, D can be larger than the other protruding bodies.
  • the larger protruding body 1070 A, B, C, D may, for example, be used to couple a heavier weight than the other protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D (e.g. to a heavier swing weight).
  • the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D are all of equal size, but one of the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D is coupled to a heavier weight than the other protruding bodies 1070A,B,C,D.
  • the protruding bodies 1070 A, B, C, D are all of equal size and each is coupled to a weight having a different mass than the other protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D.
  • the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D are all of equal size and are all couple to weights having the same mass.
  • the weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 1070 A, B, C, D can have the same mass, size, and shape as the weights 82 described above.
  • shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C in a toe to heel manner can have the same effects as discussed in previous embodiments (Shifting the CG from the heel end 1022 to the toe end 1018).
  • shifting a heavier weight to the protruding body 1070D can shift the club head 1010 CG further back on the club head 1010 also adjusting the spin imparted on the ball.
  • the adjustable weighting system 966 of golf club head 910 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 966 of golf club head 910 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 910 having the adjustable weighting system 966 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 27 and 28 illustrate a club head 1110 having a club head body 1114.
  • the club head 1110 includes an adjustable weighting system 1166 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 1110 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1 166 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 1110 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 1166.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 1166 ensures that shifts in the club head 1110 CG occur mainly in a heel end 1122 to toe end 1118 direction keeping the overall club head 1110 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weight system 1166 can comprise a recessed portion 1180 having a recessed surface 1181.
  • the recessed surface 1181 can include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise protruding bodies 1066.
  • the adjustable weight system 1166 comprises four recessed surfaces 1181 each comprising a discrete attachment location.
  • One of the discrete attachment locations comprises a feature in the form of a protruding body 1170
  • the three other discrete attachment locations can comprise any of the features described in the aforementioned list.
  • each protruding body 1170 can be configured to receive a weight.
  • the adjustable weight system 1166 comprises four recessed portions 1180A, B, C, D.
  • the recessed portions 1180A, B, C, D are circular indentations (e.g., concave, flat, etc.) including recessed surfaces 1181 A, B, C, D along a sole or bottom 1130 of the club head 1110.
  • the recessed portions 1180A, B, C, D include walls 1183 A, B, C, D separating the recessed surfaces 1181A, B, C, D from the sole 1130 of the club head 1110.
  • the recessed surfaces 1181 A, B, C, D forming part of an overall outer surface 1174 of the club head 1110.
  • the recessed portions 1180A, B, C, D include a depth measure as the distance from the recessed surface 1181 A, B, C, D to the sole 1130 of the club head 1110.
  • the recessed surfaces 1181 A, B, C, D can have depths of 0.05 to 1 inches.
  • the recessed surfaces 1181 A, B, C, D can have depths of 0.05 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.8 to 0.9, or 0.9 to 1 inches.
  • the recessed portions 1181 A, B, C, D are disposed near a trailing edge 1172 of the club head 1010, generally in an area located between a toe or toe end 1118 of the club head 1110 and a heel or heel end 1122 of the club head 1010. More specifically, a first recessed portion 1180A is positioned near the toe end 118, a second recessed portion 1180C is positioned near the heel end 1122, a third recessed portion 1180C is positioned between the toe end 1118 and the heel end 1122, and finally a fourth recessed portion 1180D is positioned adjacent the third recessed portion 1180C proximate the trailing edge 1172.
  • the recessed surface 1181 can be positioned along any portion of the club head 1110.
  • the fourth recessed portion 1180D is larger in size than the first, second and third recessed portions 1180A, B, C.
  • the recessed portions 1180A, B, C, D can all be the same size or the recessed portions 1180A, B, C, D can all vary in size.
  • the recessed portions 1180A, B, C, D can be positioned in any location and at any distance from one another on the club head body 1110. In other embodiments, there can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 recessed portions 1180.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1166 includes a single protruding body 1 170.
  • the protruding body 1 170 is generally cylindrical in shape and is positioned within the recessed portion 1180D of the club head 1110.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1166 can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 1170.
  • the protruding body 1170 can be similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, 470, 570, 670, 770, 870, 970, 1070 and may be of any shape and any configuration such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding body 1170 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding body 1 170 is cylindrical in shape.
  • the protruding body 1170 has a square cross-section, a rectangular cross- section, a triangular cross-section, or any other shape. Further, the protruding bodies 1170 can be positioned at any location on the club head 1110.
  • the protruding body 1170 extends outwardly from the outer surface 1174 of the recessed portion 1180 A.
  • the protruding body 1170 extends generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1181 A, and from a central area of the recessed surface 1181 A.
  • the recessed portions 1180B, C, D can comprise the one protruding body 1170.
  • two or more of the recessed portions 1180A, B, C, D can comprise protruding bodies 1170.
  • Each of the recessed portions 1180A, B, C, D comprises a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 1110.
  • the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • one or more protruding bodies 1170 are movable between the first, second, third, and fourth recessed portion 1180A, B, C, D.
  • the weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 1170 can have the same mass, size, and shape as the weights 82 described above.
  • shifting the weights between the recessed portions 1180A, B, C, D in a toe to heel end can have the same effects as discussed in previous embodiments (shifting the CG from the heel end 1122 to the toe end 1118).
  • shifting a heavier weight to the recessed surface 1180 D can further shift the club head CG lower and back on the club head 11 10, affecting the spin imparted on the golf ball.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1166 of golf club head 1110 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1166 of golf club head 1110 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 1110 having the adjustable weighting system 1166 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIG. 29 illustrates a club head 1210 having a club head body 1214.
  • the club head 1210 includes an adjustable weighting system 1266 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 1210 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1266 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 1210 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 1266. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 1266 ensures that shifts in the club head 1210 CG occur mainly in a heel end 1222 to toe end 1218 direction keeping the overall club head 1210 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weight system 1266 can comprise a recessed portion 1280.
  • the recessed portion 1280 comprises a recessed surface 1281 that can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1266 comprises a recessed surface 1281 including two discrete attachment locations. Each discrete attachment location comprising a feature in the form of a protruding bodies 1270A, B. Further, each protruding body 1270A, B can comprise 1 or more weights.
  • the recessed portion 1280 can be similar to the recessed portion 1080, except the recessed portion 1280 comprises a varying width, and extends across only the heel end 1222 of the club head 1210.
  • the recessed surface 1281 can be positioned proximate the toe end 1218 of the club head 1210, or the recessed surface 1281 can extend the entire portion of the club head 1210 extending between the toe end 1218 and the heel end 1222. In the illustrated
  • the recessed portion 1280 includes a recessed surface 1281 along a sole or bottom 1230 of the club head 1210.
  • the recessed surface 1281 forming part of an overall outer surface 1274 of the club head 1210.
  • the recessed surface 1281 is separated from a remainder of the sole or bottom 1230 by a wall 1283, a first edge 1292 proximate the heel end 1222, and a second edge 1294 between the heel end 1222 and the toe end 1218.
  • the recessed surface 1281 is disposed adjacent a trailing edge 1272 of the club head 1210, and extends generally in an arcuate configuration from a heel or heel end 1222 (first edge 1292) of the club head 1210 to a position that is located between the heel or heel end 1222 of the club head 1210 and a toe or toe end 1218 (second edge 1294) of the club head 1210.
  • portions of the wall 1283 near the first and second edge 1292, 1294 extend generally perpendicular to the recessed surface 1281, and one portion 1283 a of the wall 1283 between the first and second edge 1292, 1294 extends generally at an inclined angle relative to the recessed surface 1281.
  • the wall 1283a extends at an obtuse angle relative to the recessed surface 1281. In other embodiments, the wall 1283a can extend at an acute angle relative to the recessed surface 1282a. Further, the depth of the recessed surface 1281 relative to the sole 1230 (measured as the distance from the recessed surface 1281 to the sole 1230) varies from the first edge 1292 to the second edge 1294. In the illustrated embodiment, the depth of the recessed surface 1281 relative to the sole 1230 decreases from the first edge 1292 to the second edge 1294. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed surface 1281 relative to the sole 1230 can increase, decrease or remain constant from the first edge 1292 to the second edge 1294.
  • the depth of the recessed surface 1281 relative to the sole 1230 can vary from 0.05 to 1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed surface 1281 relative to the sole 1230 can vary from 0.05 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.8 to 0.9, or 0.9 to 1 inches.
  • the recessed surface 1281 further comprises a width measured as the distance from at or near the trailing edge 1272 inward to the wall 1283.
  • the width of the recessed surface 1281 is greatest near the first and second edge 1292, 1294 and smallest between the first and second edge 1292, 1294 or adjacent to the portion 1283a of the first wall 1283.
  • the width of the recessed surface 1281 can increase, decrease or remain the same from the first edge 1292 to the second edge 1294 of the recessed surface 1281.
  • the width of the recessed surface 1281 can vary from 0.1 to 3 inches.
  • the width of the recessed surface 1281 can vary from 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 1.0, 0.7 to 1.3, 1.0 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, 1.5 to 2.0, 1.7 to 2.3, 2 to 2.5, 2.3 to 2.7, or 2.5 to 3 inches.
  • the adjustable weight system 1280 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1266 includes at least one protruding body 1270 that receives a weight.
  • the weight can be similar to the weights 82 described above.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1266 includes two protruding bodies 1270A, B.
  • the protruding bodies 1270 are positioned within a recessed portion 1280 of the club head 1210.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1266 can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 1270 and can be positioned anywhere on the club head 1210.
  • the protruding bodies 1270A, B can be similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, 270, 470, 570, 670, 770, 870, 970, 1070, 1170 and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1270A, B (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 1270A, B are cylindrical in shape.
  • the protruding bodies 1270 A, B may have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 1270A, B extend outwardly from the outer surface 1274. As illustrated in FIG. 29, a first one of the protruding bodies 1270A is located at a first position at or near the second edge 1294, and a second one of the protruding bodies 1270B is located at a second position at or near the first edge 1292 near the heel end 1222 of the club head 1210.
  • Each protruding body 1270 A, B defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 1210. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion., .
  • the recessed surface 1281 is generally wider at the locations near the first and second protruding bodies 1270A, B than at locations between the first and second protruding bodies 1270 A, B, such that the first wall 1283 partially surrounds the protruding bodies 1270.
  • the recessed surface 1281 can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 protruding bodies 1270.
  • the weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 1270 A, B can have the same mass, size, and shape as the weights 82 described above. Further, shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 1270A, B in a font-toe to back- center manner can shift the CG between the center and the toe, while also changing it from the front to the back.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1266 of golf club head 1210 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1266 of golf club head 1210 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 1210 having the adjustable weighting system 1266 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates a club head 1310 having a club head body 1314.
  • the club head 1310 includes an adjustable weighting system 1366 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 1310 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1366 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 1310 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 1366. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 1366 ensures that shifts in the club head 1310 CG occur mainly in a heel end 1322 to toe end 1318 direction keeping the overall club head 1310 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1366 can comprise a recessed portion 1380.
  • the recessed portion 1380 comprises a recessed surface 1381 that can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1366 comprises a recessed portion 1381 including four discrete attachment locations.
  • the four discrete attachment locations each comprising a feature in the form of a protruding body 1370 (three in the form of a rib and one in the form of a peg).
  • the protruding bodies 1370 can comprise one or more weights.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1366 can include a cover 1311 comprising a same shape as the recessed portion 1380. The cover 1311 can be coupled to the recessed portion 1380 through the use of the protruding bodies and an extra weight or fastener.
  • the recessed portion 1380 is similar to the recessed portion 980 having a first a first portion 1385 that extends from an intersection region 1398 toward a toe or toe end 1318 of the club head 1310, a second portion 1387 that extends from the intersection region 1398 toward to a heel or heel end 1322 of the club head 1310, and a third portion 1389 that extends generally inwardly from the intersection region 1398 toward a center of the sole or bottom 1330.
  • the recessed portion 1380 has a recessed surface 1381 similar to the recessed surface 981.
  • the recessed portion 1380 and recessed surface 1381 can have the same width, depth and dimensions as the recessed portion 980 and recessed surface 981.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1366 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1366 includes four protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1315 (three of which 1370B, C, 1315 are visible in FIG. 30).
  • the protruding bodies 1370 A, B, C are generally elongate ribs having a trapezoidal shape, and are positioned within a recessed portion 1380 of the club head 1310.
  • the protruding body 1315 is a peg style protruding body 1370 having generally a cylindrical shape.
  • the protruding bodies 1370 A, B, C, 1315 may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1370 A, B, C, 1315 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1315 may be cylindrical in shape, have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1315 may be positioned at any location on the club head 1310.
  • the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1315 extend outwardly from the outer surface 1374.
  • the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1315 extend generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1381. As illustrated in FIG.
  • a first one of the protruding bodies 1370A (not visible) is located at the first portion 1385 of the recessed portion 1380 near the toe end 1318
  • a second one of the protruding bodies 1370C is located at the second portion 1387 of the recessed portion 1380 near the heel end 1322
  • a third one of the protruding bodies 1370B is located at the intersecting region 1398between the first and second portions 1385, 1387 of the recessed portion
  • a fourth one of the protruding bodies 1315 is positioned in third portion 1385 of the recessed portion.
  • Each of the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1325 defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 1382 to the club head 1310.
  • the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • Other embodiments include different locations for the protruding bodies 1370 A, B, C, 1315.
  • the weights 1382 have general elongate shapes that correspond to the shapes of the protruding bodies 1370 A, B, C.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1366 comprises 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 weights 1382 configured to couple with the protrusions 1370 A, B, C.
  • the weights 1382 include generally elongate apertures 1386 that are sized and shaped to receive the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C.
  • the protruding body 1315 can be configured to couple with a weight similar to the weight 82 or to the weight 1382.
  • the apertures 1386 are through apertures that extend entirely through the weights 1382.
  • the weights 1382 instead have blind apertures.
  • the weights 1382 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 1382 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 1382 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic.
  • the weights 1382 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 1382 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 1382.
  • each of the weights 1382 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass.
  • the weights 1382 may vary in both volume and material from one another.
  • one of the structures labeled as 1382 is not a weight, but rather a lightweight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C.
  • the weights may vary between 0.1-50g.
  • one or more of the weights 1382 may vary between 0-1 Og, one or more of the weights 1382 may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights 1382 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 1382 may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights 1382 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 1382 may vary between 0-lOg
  • a second weight 1382 may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight 1382 may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 1382 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight 1382 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 1382 may vary between l-5g, and a second and third weight 1382 may vary between 5-3 Og. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 1382 may vary between 1-lOg, and a third and fourth weight 1382, may vary between 5-25g. In some embodiments, a first weight 1382 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 1382 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 1382 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 1382 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 1382 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 1382 each have a mass of 0.75 grams.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25- 2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight 1382 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0. l-50g.
  • the weights 1382 are coupled to the protruding bodies 1370 A, B, C with friction fits (e.g., by pressing the weights 1382 over the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, or using a tool to attach or remove the weights 1382).
  • the weights 1382 A, B, C are coupled to the protruding bodies 1370 A, B, C with snap fit mechanisms, with threaded arrangements, with set screws positioned within threaded inner surfaces of the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, or with other structures.
  • each protruding body 1370A, B, C can comprise a weight 1382.
  • the weights may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 1370 A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 1310 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias.
  • a heavier weight is positioned on the third protruding body 1370B, located between the toe or toe end 1318 and the heel or heel end 1322, while lighter weights are positioned on the first and second protruding bodies 1370A, C near the toe or toe end 1318 and the heel or heel end 1322.
  • the aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 1334 of the club head 1310.
  • a heavier weight is positioned on the second protruding body 1370C near the heel or heel end 1322, while lighter weights are positioned on the first protruding body 1370A near the toe or toe end 1318 and on the third protruding body 1370B that is located between the toe or toe end 1318 and the heel or heel end 1322.
  • aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 1322 of the club head 1310.
  • a heavier weight is positioned on the first protruding body 1370A near the toe or toe end 1318, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding body second 1370C near the heel or heel end 1322 and on the third protruding body 1370B that is located between the toe or toe end 1318 and the heel or heel end 1322.
  • the aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 1318 of the club head 1310.
  • a heavier weight 1382 can be positioned on the fourth protruding body 1370D in the third portion of the recess further from the trailing edge 1372, while lighter weights can be positioned on the first, second and third protrusions 1370A, B, C positioned near the toe end 1318, the heel end 1322 and between the toe end 1318 and the heel end 1322.
  • the aforementioned weight placement can result in the CG being shifted towards the front of the club head 1310 effecting the spin imparted on the ball.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 1370 A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 1370A, B, C has its own corresponding weight or set of weights.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1366 of golf club head 1310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1366 of golf club head 1310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 1310 having the adjustable weighting system 1366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • the club head 1310 further includes a cover 1311.
  • the cover 1311 has a shape or profile that generally mirrors the shape or profile of the recessed portion 1380.
  • the cover 1311 is coupled to the sole or bottom 1330, and covers the protruding bodies 1370 A, B, C and the corresponding weights 1382.
  • the cover 1311 defines an aperture 1313 that fits over (e.g., in a friction or snap-fit arrangement) the protrusion 1315 on the recessed surface 1381.
  • the cover 1311 also defines an outer recess 1316 for a sole weight.
  • the sole weight can be similar to the weights 82 or the sole weight can be similar to the weights 1382.
  • the sole weight can function as a swing weight (e.g. being heavier than the weights 1382).
  • the cover 1311 does not include the outer recess 1316 and/or the aperture 1313. Rather, the cover 1311 is solely a protective barrier and/or outer surface of the club head body 1314 that covers the recessed portion 1380 and the weights 1382 within the recessed portion 1380.
  • FIG. 31 illustrates a club head 1410 having a club head body 1414.
  • the club head 1410 includes an adjustable weighting system 1466 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 1410 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1466 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 1410 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 1466. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 1466 ensures that shifts in the club head 1410 CG occur mainly in a heel end 1422 to toe end 1418 direction keeping the overall club head 1410 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1466 can comprise a recessed portion 1480.
  • the recessed portion 1480 comprises a recessed surface 1481 that can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1480 a recessed surface 1480 including three discrete attachment locations.
  • the three discrete attachment locations each comprising a feature in the form of a protruding bodies 1470A, B, C. Further, each of the protruding bodies 1470A, B, C can comprise one or more weights.
  • the recessed portion 1480 is similar to the recessed portions 980, 1380, having a first a first portion 1485 that extends from an intersection region 1498 toward a toe or toe end 1418 of the club head 1410, a second portion 1487 that extends from the intersection region 1498 toward to a heel or heel end 1422 of the club head 1410, and a third portion 1489 that extends generally forward from the intersection region 1498 towards the face or strike plate 1438 of the club head 1410.
  • the intersection region 1498 of the recessed portion 1480 is positioned near or at the center of the sole 1430 as opposed to being positioned adjacent the trailing edge 1472 (such as the intersecting regions 1398, 998 are positioned adjacent the trailing edges 972, 1372) Further, the recessed portion 1480 has a recessed surface 1481 similar to the recessed surfaces 981, 1381. Thus, the recessed portion 1480 and recessed surface 1481 can have the same width, depth and dimensions as the recessed portions 980, 1380 and recessed surfaces 981, 1381.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1466 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266, and 1366.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1466 includes three protruding bodies 1470A, B, C.
  • the protruding bodies 1470 A, B, C may be of any shapes and any other materials.
  • the protruding bodies 1470 A, B, C are cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1470A, B, C have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 1470A, B, C are positioned within a recessed portion 1480 of the club head 1410.
  • the protruding bodies 1470A, B, C extend generally perpendicularly in an outward direction from the recessed surface 1481.
  • a first one of the protruding bodies 1470 A extends from the first portion 1485 near the toe end 1418
  • a second one of the protruding bodies 1470C extends from the second portion 1487 near the heel end 1422
  • a third one of the protruding bodies 1470B extends from the third portion 1489 between the toe and heel end 1418, 1422 of the club head 1410.
  • Each of the protruding bodies 1470 A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 1410.
  • the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the club head 1410 further includes an additional protruding body 1415 that extends from the outer surface 1474 of the club head 1410, generally adjacent the recessed portion 1480.
  • the additional protrusion 1415 may be used, for example, to receive a cover (e.g., similar to the cover 131 1 described above).
  • the club head 1410 also includes an extended portion 1450 similar to the extended portion 750 having a top surface 1455 extending from a first end 1451 between the trailing edge 1472 and the center of the sole 1430 to a second end 1452 positioned at the trailing edge 1472.
  • the width and height of the extended portion 1450 can vary similar to the extended portion 750.
  • the weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 1470 A, B, C can have the same mass, size, and shape as the weights 82 described above. Further, shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 1470 A, C, in a toe to heel manner can have the same effects as discussed in previous embodiments (Shifting the CG from the heel end 1422 to the toe end 1218). Further, shifting a heavier weight to the protruding body 1470B can shift the club head 1410 CG towards the front of the club head 1410 affecting the spin imparted on the ball.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1466 of golf club head 1410 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1466 of golf club head 1410 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 1410 having the adjustable weighting system 1466 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIG. 32 illustrates a club head 1510 having a club head body 1514.
  • the club head 1510 includes an adjustable weighting system 1566 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 1510 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1566 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 1510 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 1566. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 1566 ensures that shifts in the club head 1510 CG occur mainly in a heel end 1522 to toe end 1518 direction keeping the overall club head 1510 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1566 includes a recessed portion 1580, The recessed portion 1580 comprising a recessed surface 1581 that can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1566 includes a recessed surface 1581 comprising four discrete attachment locations.
  • the four discrete attachment locations each comprising a feature in the form of a protruding body 1570A, B, C, D.
  • the club head 1510 includes an extended portion 1550 comprising a portion of the recessed surface 1581.
  • the extended portion 1550 is similar to the extended portions 750, 1450.
  • the extended portion 1550 includes a top surface 1555 extending from a first end 1551, positioned between the trailing edge 1572 and a center of the sole 1530, to a second end 1552, positioned near or at the trailing edge 1572.
  • the width and height of the extended portion 1550 can vary similarly to the width and height of the extended portion 750, 1450 described above.
  • the recessed portion 1580 is similar to the recessed portion 1480 having an intersection region 1598 positioned near the center of the sole 1530, a first portion 1585 that extends from the intersection region 1598 toward a toe or toe end 1518 of the club head 1510, a second portion 1587 that extends from the intersection region 1598 toward to a heel or heel end 1522 of the club head 1510, and a third portion 1589 that extends generally forward from the intersection region 1598 toward a face or strike plate (not shown).
  • the recessed portion 1580 includes a fourth portion 1588 that extends from the intersection region 1598 generally backwards towards the trailing edge 1572 between the first and second portions 1585, 1587.
  • the fourth portion 1588 extends onto the top surface 1555 of the extended portion 1550.
  • the recessed portion 1580 has a recessed surface 1581 similar to the recessed surface 981, 1281, 1381.
  • the recessed portion 1580 and recessed surface 1581 can have the same width, depth and dimensions as the recessed portions 980, 1280, 1380 and recessed surfaces 981, 1281, 1381.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1566 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266, 1366, and 1466.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1566 includes four protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D each defining an attachment point for a weight (not shown). The weight can be similar to the weight 82 described above.
  • the protruding bodies 1570 A, B, C, D may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D are cylindrical in shape.
  • the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross- sections, or have any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D can be positioned at any location in the recessed portion 1580 and extend generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1581.
  • a first one of the protruding bodies 1570A extends from the first portion 1585
  • a second one of the protruding bodies 1570C extends from the second portion 1587
  • a third one of the protruding bodies 1570B extends from the third portion 1589
  • a fourth one of the protruding bodies 1570D extends from the fourth portion 1588.
  • Each of the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 1510. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In other
  • the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D can be positioned in different locations in the recessed portion 1580 or the club head 1510.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1566 can include 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 1570.
  • the weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D can have the same mass, size, and shape as the weights 82 described above. Further, shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 1570A, C in a toe to heel manner can have the same effects as discussed in previous embodiments (Shifting the CG from the heel end 1522 to the toe end 1518). Further, shifting a heavier weight to the protruding body 1570B, D can shift the club head 1566 CG towards the front or the back of the club head 1566 affecting the spin imparted on the ball.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1566 of golf club head 1566 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1566 of golf club head 1566 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 1566 having the adjustable weighting system 1566 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • the club head 1510 further includes an additional protrusion 1515 that extends from the outer surface 1574 of the club head 1510, generally adjacent the recessed portion 1580.
  • the additional protrusion 1515 may be used, for example, to receive a cover (e.g., similar to the protrusion 1315 and cover 1311 described above).
  • FIGS. 33 and 34 illustrate a club head 1610 having a club head body 1614.
  • the club head 1610 includes an adjustable weighting system 1666 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 1610 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1666 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 1610 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 1666.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 1666 ensures that shifts in the club head 1610 CG occur mainly in a heel end 1622 to toe end 1618 direction keeping the overall club head 1610 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1666 includes a recessed portion 1680.
  • the recessed portion 1680 comprising a recessed surface 1681 can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1666 includes a recessed surface 1681 comprising four discrete attachment locations. Each of the four discrete attachment locations comprising a feature in the form of protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D.
  • the club head 1610 includes an extended portion 1650
  • I % comprising a portion of the recessed surface 1681.
  • the extended portion 1650 is similar to the extended portions 750, 1450, 1550.
  • the extended portion 1650 includes a top surface 1655 extending from a first end 1651, positioned between the trailing edge 1672 and a center of the sole 1630, to a second end 1652, positioned at or near the trailing edge 1672.
  • the width and height of the extended portion 1650 can vary similarly to the width and height of the extended portion 750, 1450 described above.
  • the recessed portion 1680 is similar to the recessed portion 1580 having an intersection region 1698 positioned near the center of the sole 1630, a first portion 1685 that extends from the intersection region 1698 toward a toe or toe end 1618 of the club head 1610, a second portion 1687 that extends from the intersection region 1698 toward to a heel or heel end 1622 of the club head 1610, a third portion 1689 that extends generally forward from the intersection region 1698 toward a face or strike plate (not shown), and a fourth portion 1688 that extends from the intersection region 1698 generally backwards towards the trailing edge 1672 between the first and second portions 1685, 1687.
  • the first portion 1685 and the second portion 1657 of the recessed portion 1680 comprise varying widths.
  • a width of the recessed portion is larger near the heel or heel end 1622 and the toe or toe end 1618 of the first and second portions 1689, 1691, than toward areas of the first and second portions 1689, 1691 that are closer to the intersection region 1698.
  • the width of the first and second portion 1685, 1687 can increase, decrease and/or remain constant from near the intersection region 1698 to near the toe and heel ends 1618, 1622, respectively.
  • the recessed portion 1580 has a recessed surface 1581 similar to the recessed surface 981, 1281, 1381.
  • the recessed portion 1580 and recessed surface 1581 can have the same width, depth and dimensions as the recessed portions 980, 1280, 1380 and recessed surfaces 981, 1281, 1381.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1666 includes four protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D within the recessed portion 1680, each defining an attachment point for a weight 1682.
  • the protruding bodies 1670 A, B, C, D may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1670 A, B, C, D (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D are cylindrical in shape.
  • the protruding bodies 1670 A, B, C, D have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross- sections, or have any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 1670 A, B, C, D can be positioned at any location in the recessed portion 1680 and extend generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1681.
  • a first one of the protruding bodies 1670 A extends from the first portion 1685
  • a second one of the protruding bodies 1670C extends from the second portion 1687
  • a third one of the protruding bodies 1670B extends from the third portion 1689
  • a fourth one of the protruding bodies 1670D extends from the fourth portion 1688.
  • Each of the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 1682 to the club head 1610.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1666 can include 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 1670.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1666 can include a weight 1682.
  • the weight 1682 may take the shape of the recessed portion 1680.
  • a single weight 1682 is illustrated, which fits down onto the first portion 1685.
  • the weight 1682 includes a generally cylindrical aperture 1686 that is sized and shaped to receive the protruding body 1670A in the first portion 1685.
  • the aperture 1686 is a through aperture that extends entirely through the weight 1682.
  • the weight or weights 1682 have blind apertures.
  • the protruding body or bodies 1670A, B, C, D have external threads, and the weight or weights 1682 have internal threads within the apertures 1686, such that the weights 1682 are threadably coupled to the protruding bodies 1670.
  • the weight or weights 1682 are coupled to the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D with friction fits, with snap-fit mechanisms, with set screws positioned within threaded inner surfaces of the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D, or with other structures.
  • the weights 1682 are generally flat, to increase club head moment of inertia, although other embodiments include different shapes than that illustrated.
  • the weights 1682 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 1682 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 1682 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic.
  • the weights 1682 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 1682 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 1682.
  • each of the weights 1682 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass.
  • the weights 1682 may vary in both volume and material from one another.
  • one of the structures labeled as 1682 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap- fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D.
  • the weights may vary between 0.1-50g.
  • one or more of the weights 1682 may vary between 0- lOg, one or more of the weights 1682 may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights 1682 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 1682 may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights 1682 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 1682 may vary between 0-1 Og
  • a second weight 1682 may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight 1682 may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 1682 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight 1682 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 1682 may vary between l-5g, and a second and third weight 1682 may vary between 5-30g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 1682 may vary between 1-lOg, and a third and fourth weight 1682, may vary between 5-25g. In some embodiments, a first weight 1682 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 1682 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 1682 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 1682 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 1682 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 1682 each have a mass of 0.75 grams.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10, 1 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50g.
  • one of the protruding bodies 1670A receives a weight 1682.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 1670 A, B, C, D receives a weight 1682, while the remaining protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D receives more than one weight 1682.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 1670 A, B, C, D does not extend past an outer profile of the club head 1610, such that even if the protruding body 1670A, B, C, D is left bare and uncovered, the protruding body will not interfere with or disrupt a golfer's swing.
  • the protruding bodies 1670B, D can comprise weights similar to the weights 82, while the weights 1670A, C can comprise weights 1682.
  • the weights 1682 configured to couple with the protruding bodies 1670 A, B, C, D can be strategically positioned to adjust the club head 1610 CG. Shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 1670A, C in a toe to heel manner can have the same effects as discussed in previous embodiments (Shifting the CG from the heel end 1622 to the toe end 1618). Further, shifting a heavier weight to the protruding body 1670B, D can shift the club head 1666 CG towards the front or the back of the club head 1666 affecting the spin imparted on the ball.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1666 of golf club head 1666 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1666 of golf club head 1666 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 1666 having the adjustable weighting system 1666 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • the club head 1610 further includes an additional protrusion 1615 that extends from the outer surface 1674 of the club head 1610, generally adjacent the recessed portion 1680.
  • the additional protrusion 1615 may be used, for example, to receive a cover (e.g., similar to the cover 1311 described above).
  • FIG. 35 illustrates a club head 1710 having a club head body 1714.
  • I % head 1710 includes an adjustable weighting system 1766.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1766 is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 1710 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance
  • the adjustable weighting system 1766 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 1710 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 1766. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 1766 ensures that shifts in the club head 1710 CG occur mainly in a heel end 1722 to toe end 1718 direction keeping the overall club head 1710 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1766 includes a recessed portion 1780, The recessed portion 1780 comprising a recessed surface 1781 that can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1766 includes a recessed surface 1781 comprising six discrete attachment locations. Each of the six discrete attachment locations comprising a feature in the form of a protruding body 1770 A, B, C, D, E, F.
  • the recessed portion 1780 is similar to the recessed portion 980, 1380 having a first a first portion 1785 that extends from an intersection region 1798 toward a toe or toe end 1718, a second portion 1787 that extends from the intersection region 1798 toward to a heel or heel end 1722, a third portion 1789 that extends generally inwardly from the intersection region 1798 toward a center of the sole or bottom 1730.
  • the recessed portion 1780 further includes a fourth portion 1786 extending between the first portion 1785 and the toe end 1718, and a fifth portion 1788 extending between the second portion 1787 and the heel end 1722.
  • the first, second, fourth and fifth portions 1785, 1787, 1786, 1788 extend in an arcuate configuration from the toe end 1718 to the heel end 1722.
  • the recessed portion 1780 has a recessed surface 1781 similar to the recessed surfaces 981, 1381.
  • the recessed portion 1780 and recessed surface 1781 can have the same width, depth and dimensions as the recessed portions 980, 1380 and recessed surfaces 981, 1381.
  • the walls 1783 generally define and partially separate the first portion 1789, the second portion 1791, the third portion 1793, the fourth portion 1795, and the fifth portion 1797 from each other.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1766 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266, 1366, 1466, 1566, and 1666.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1766 includes six protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F each defining an attachment point for a weight (not shown). The weight can be similar to the weight 82 or the weight 1682 described above.
  • the protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1770 A, B, C, D, E, F (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 1770 A, B, C, D, E, F are cylindrical in shape.
  • the protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F can be positioned at any location in the recessed portion 1780 and extend generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1781.
  • a first one of the protruding bodies 1770A extends from the fourth portion 1786 nearest the toe end 1718
  • a second one of the protruding bodies 1770E extends from the sixth portion 1788 nearest the heel end 1722
  • a third one of the protruding bodies 1770F extends from the third portion 1789
  • a fourth one of the protruding bodies 1770B extends from the first portion 1785
  • a fifth one of the protruding bodies 1770D extends from the second portion 1787
  • a sixth one of the protruding bodies 1770C extends from the intersection region 1798 of the third portion 1793, the fourth portion 1795, and the fifth portion 1797.
  • Each of the protruding bodies 1770A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight (not shown) to the club head 10.
  • the weights can be similar to the weights 81, 1682 described above.
  • the protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F can be positioned in different locations within the recessed portion 1780 or the club head 1710.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1766 can include 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 1770.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1766 of golf club head 1766 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system .
  • the adjustable weighting system 1766 of golf club head 1766 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 1766 having the adjustable weighting system 1766 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIG. 36 illustrates a club head 1810 having a club head body 1814.
  • the club head 1810 includes an adjustable weighting system 1866.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1866 is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 1810 center of gravity
  • the adjustable weighting system 1866 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 1810 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 1866. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 1866 ensures that shifts in the club head 1810 CG occur mainly in a heel end 1822 to toe end 1818 direction keeping the overall club head 1810 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weight system 1866 can comprise a recessed portion 1880.
  • the recessed portion 1880 can comprise a recessed surface 1881 that can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1866 includes a recessed surface 1881 comprising four discrete attachment locations.
  • the four discrete attachment locations each comprising a feature in the form of a protruding body 1870A, B, C, D.
  • Each protruding body 1870A, B, C, D configured to receive a weight.
  • the recessed portion 1866 is similar to the recessed portions 980, 1380, 1780 having a first portion 1885 that extends from an intersection region 1898 towards a toe end 1818, a second portion 1887 that extends from the intersection region 1898 towards a heel end 1822, and a third portion 1889 that extends generally inwardly from the intersection region 1898 toward a center of the sole 1830. Similar to the recessed portions 980, 1380, 1780, the first and second portions 1885, 1887 of the recessed portion 1880 extend generally from a toe end 1818 to a heel end 1822 following the contour of the trailing edge 1872.
  • first portions 1885 and the second portion 1887 of the recessed portion 1880 comprise varying widths.
  • the width of the first portion and second portions 1885, 1887 is larger near the toe and heel ends 1818, 1822 of the first and second portion 1885, 1887, than toward the area of the first and second portions 1885, 1887 directly adjacent to the intersection region 1898.
  • the third portion 1889 includes a width, which increases from the intersection region 1898 to a point of maximum width and decreases from the point of maximum width towards the center of the sole 1830.
  • the width of the first, second and third portions 1885, 1887, 1889 can increase, decrease and/or remain constant from the intersection region 1898 towards the toe end 1818, heel end 1822, and center of the sole 1830 respectively.
  • the recessed portion 1880 can comprise a recessed surface 1881.
  • the recessed surface 1881 can have a width, depth and dimensions similar to the width depth and dimensions as the recessed surface 981, 1381, 1781 of recessed portions 980, 1380, 1780.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1866 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266, 1366, 1466, 1566, 1666, and 1766.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1866 includes four protruding bodies 1870 A, B, C, D each defining an attachment point for a weight (not shown). The weight can be similar to the weights 82, 1682 described above.
  • the protruding bodies 1870A, B, C, D may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1870A, B, C, D (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 1870A, B, C, D are cylindrical in shape.
  • the protruding bodies 1870 have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 1870A, B, C, D can be positioned at any location in the recessed portion 1880 and extend generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1881.
  • a first one of the protruding bodies 1870A extends from the first portion 18885
  • a second one of the protruding bodies 1870C extends from the second portion 1887
  • a third one of the protruding bodies 1870B extends from the third portion 1893 near the intersection region 1898
  • a fourth one of the protruding bodies 1870D extends from the third portion 1889 near the center of the sole 1830.
  • Each of the protruding bodies 1870A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight (not shown) to the club head 1810.
  • the weights can be similar to the weights 81, 1682 described above.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1866 of golf club head 1866 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1866 of golf club head 1866 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 1866 having the adjustable weighting system 1866 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 37 and 38 illustrate a club head 1910 having a club head body 1914.
  • the club head 1910 includes an adjustable weighting system 1966.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1966 is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 1910 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1966 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 1910 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 1966. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 1966 ensures that shifts in the club head 1910 CG occur mainly in a heel end 1922 to toe end 1918 direction keeping the overall club head 1910 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weight system 1966 can comprise a recessed portion 1980.
  • the recessed portion 1980 can comprise a recessed surface 1981 that can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1966 includes a recessed surface 1981 comprising four discrete attachment locations. Each of the four discrete attachment locations comprises a feature in the form of a protruding body 1970A, B, C, D. Each protruding body 1970A, B, C, D configured to receive a weight.
  • the recessed portion 1966 is similar to the recessed portions 980, 1380, 1780, 1880 having a first portion 1985 that extends from an intersection region 1998 towards a toe end 1918, a second portion 1987 that extends from the intersection region 1998 towards a heel end 1922, and a third portion 1989 that extends generally inwardly from the intersection region 1998 toward a center of the sole 1930. Similar to the recessed portions 980, 1380, 1780, 1880 the first and second portions 1985, 1987 of the recessed portion 1980 extend generally from a toe end 1918 to a heel end 1922 following the contour of the trailing edge 1972. However, the first portions 1985 and the second portion 1987 of the recessed portion 1980 comprise varying widths.
  • the first portion 1985 comprises a first part 1985A adjacent the toe end 1818 having a greater width than a second part 1985B having a constant width extending from the intersection region 1998 to the first part 1985 A of the first portion 1985.
  • the second portion 1987 comprises a first part 1987A adjacent the heel end 1822 having a greater width than a second part 1987B having a constant width extending from the intersection region 1998 to the first part 1987 A of the second portion 1987.
  • the third portion 1989 includes a width which increases from the intersection region 1998 to a point of maximum width and decreases from the point of maximum width towards the center of the sole 1930.
  • the width of the first, second and third portions 1985, 1987, 1989 can increase, decrease and/or remain constant from the intersection region 1998 towards the toe end 1918, heel end 1922, and center of the sole 1930 respectively.
  • the recessed portion 1980 can comprise a recessed surface 1981.
  • the recessed surface 1981 can have a width, depth and dimensions similar to the width depth and dimensions as the recessed surface 981, 1381, 1781, 1881 of recessed portions 980, 1380, 1780, 1880.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1966 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266, 1366, 1466, 1566, 1666, 1766, and 1866.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1966 includes four protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D each defining an attachment point for a weight 1982.
  • the protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1970 A, B, C, D (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D are cylindrical in shape.
  • the protruding bodies 1970 have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 1980A, B, C, D can be positioned at any location within the recessed portion 1980 extending generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1981.
  • a first one of the protruding bodies 1970 A extends from the first portion 1985
  • a second one of the protruding bodies 1970C extends from the second portion 1987
  • a third one of the protruding bodies 1970B extends from the third portion 1989 near the intersection region 1998
  • a fourth one of the protruding bodies 1970D extends from the third portion 1989 near the center of the sole 1930.
  • Each of the protruding bodies 1970A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 1910. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1966 can include a weight 1982.
  • the weight 1982 may take the shape of any part of the recessed portion 1980.
  • three weights 1982 are illustrated, a first and second weight 1982 fit into the first part of the first and second portions 1985 A, 1987 A, and a third weight 1982 fits into the third portion 1989 near the intersection region 1998.
  • the weight 1982 includes a generally cylindrical aperture 1986 that is sized and shaped to receive the protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D.
  • the aperture 1986 is a through aperture that extends entirely through the weight 1982.
  • the weight or weights 1982 have blind apertures.
  • the protruding body or bodies 1970A, B, C, D have external threads
  • the weight or weights 1982 have internal threads within the apertures 1986, such that the weights 1982 are threadably coupled to the protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D.
  • the weight or weights 1982 are coupled to the protruding bodies 1970 A, B, C, D with friction fits, with snap-fit mechanisms, with set screws positioned within threaded inner surfaces of the protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D, or with other structures.
  • the weights 1982 may have different shapes, depending on whether the weights 1982 are being positioned on the first and second protruding bodies 1970 A, C or the third and fourth protruding bodies 1970B, C.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D is not coupled to a weight 1982.
  • the protruding body 1970A, B, C, D may be left bare and uncovered, or may be covered by another structure (e.g., similar to the cover 1311).
  • the weight 38 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 1970.
  • the weight 1982 (or cover) is sized and shaped to fit against a wall 1983 that surrounds the recessed surface 1981, and to press against the wall 1983 via a friction fit to help further hold the weight 1982 in place.
  • the wall 1983 may act to help couple (and in some cases align and orientate) a particularly-shaped weight 1982.
  • the weights 1982 are generally flat, to increase club head moment of inertia, although other embodiments include different shapes than that illustrated.
  • the weights 1982 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 1982 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 1982 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic.
  • the weights 1982 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 1982 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 1982.
  • each of the weights 1982 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass.
  • the weights 1982 may vary in both volume and material from one another.
  • one of the structures labeled as 1982 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap- fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D.
  • the weights may vary between 0.1-50g.
  • one or more of the weights 1982 may vary between 0- lOg, one or more of the weights 1982 may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights 1982 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 1982 may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights 1982 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 1982 may vary between 0-1 Og
  • a second weight 1982 may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight 1982 may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 1982 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight 1982 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 1982 may vary between l-5g, and a second and third weight 1682 may vary between 5-30g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 1982 may vary between 1-lOg, and a third and fourth weight 1982, may vary between 5-25g. In some embodiments, a first weight 1982 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 1982 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 1982 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 1982 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 1982 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 1982 each have a mass of 0.75 grams.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, or 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 , 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1 -50g.
  • the club head center of gravity By moving a weight between the third and fourth protruding bodies 1970B, D, the club head center of gravity can be shifted towards the strike plate (not shown) or towards the rear end. By moving a weight between the first and second protruding bodies 1970 A, C, the club head center of gravity can be shifted towards the toe end 1818 or the heel end 1822.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1966 of golf club head 1966 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 1966 of golf club head 1966 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 1966 having the adjustable weighting system 1966 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIG. 39 illustrates a club head 2010 having a club head body 2014.
  • the club head 2010 includes an adjustable weighting system 2066.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2066 is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 2010 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2066 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 2010 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 2066. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 2066 ensures that shifts in the club head 2010 CG occur mainly in a heel end 2022 to toe end 2018 direction keeping the overall club head 2010 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2066 comprises a recessed portion 2080 having a recessed surface 2081 configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2066 comprises a recessed surface 2081 including three discrete attachment locations. The three discrete attachment locations each having a feature in the form of a protruding body 2070 A, B, C.
  • the recessed portion 2080, recessed surface 2081, and protruding bodies 2070 A, B, C of the club head 2010 are the same as the recessed portion 1980, recessed surface 1981, and protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D of the adjustable weight system 1966.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2066 comprises only three protruding bodies 2070A, B, C. In FIG. 39, it can be seen that the adjustable weighting system 2066 does not include a protruding body 2070 in the third portion 2089 near the intersection region 2098, such as protrusion 1970B of the adjustable weight system 1966 shown in FIGS. 37 and 38.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2066 of golf club head 2010 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2066 of golf club head 2066 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 2066 having the adjustable weighting system 2066 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 40 and 41 illustrate a club head 2110 having a club head body 2114.
  • the club head 2110 includes an adjustable weighting system 2166 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 2110 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2166 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 2110 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 2166.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 2166 ensures that shifts in the club head 2110 CG occur mainly in a heel end 2122 to toe end 2118 direction keeping the overall club head 2110 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2166 can comprise a recessed portion 2180.
  • the recessed portion 2180 is defined by a recessed surface 2181 and a wall 2183.
  • the recessed surface 2181 and/or the wall 2183 can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2180 comprises a recessed surface 2181 including three discrete attachment locations.
  • the three discrete attachment locations each including two features in the form of a protruding body 2170 A, B, C, D, E, F.
  • the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F are positioned in pairs across the length of the recessed portion 2170, wherein each pair of protruding bodies 2170 A, B, C, D, E,F defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 2110.
  • the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the recessed portion 2180 extends from near the toe end 2118 in an arcuate manner to near the heel end 2222 following the contour of the trailing edge 2172.
  • the recessed portion 2180 is defined by the recessed surface 2180 being offset and separated from the sole 2130 of the club head 2110.
  • the recessed surface 2180 extends substantially parallel to the sole 2130 of the club head 2110, while the wall 2183 extends substantially perpendicular to the sole 2130 of the club head 2110.
  • the recessed portion 2180 includes a depth measured as the distance between the recessed surface 2181 and the sole 2130 of the club head 2110 (or the height of the wall 2183).
  • the recessed portion 2180 has a constant depth along its length from the toe end 2118 to the heel end 2122.
  • the recessed portion 2180 can have an increasing, decreasing or constant depth along its length from the toe end 2118 to the heel end 2122.
  • the weight when a weight (not shown) is coupled to the club head 2110 in one region of the recessed portion 2180, the weight may fit flush in the recessed portion 2180 and/or be concealed by the wall 2183.
  • a portion of the weight When the weight is coupled to the club head 2110 in a different region of the recessed portion 2180, a portion of the weight may protrude beyond the wall 2183 as the depth is less than the height of the weight.
  • the recessed portion 2180 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 2166 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, in some
  • the recessed portion 2180 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2180 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed portion 2180 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches.
  • the recessed portion 2180 includes a width measured as the distance between the wall 2183 and the end of the recessed portion at or near the trailing edge 2172.
  • the recessed portion 2180 includes a constant width.
  • the recessed portion 2180 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width.
  • the width can be less than 2.0 inches.
  • the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches.
  • the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
  • the recessed portion 2180 can include one or more protruding bodies 2170 defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 2110.
  • the adjustable weight system 2166 comprises six protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F.
  • the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F are rib style bodies extending perpendicularly from both the wall 2183 and the recessed surface 2181.
  • the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F can be other features for coupling a weight to the club head such as an aperture, recess, ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches, tabs, cutout regions, ribs, grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the recessed portion 2180 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten features 2170.
  • the protruding bodies 2170 A, B, C, D, E, F are positioned only on the recessed surface 2181 of the recessed portion 2180.
  • the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F can be positioned only on the wall 2183 of the recessed portion 2180.
  • the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F are disposed within the recessed portion 2180 extending partially from the wall 2183 and partially from the recessed surface 2181 such that one or more weights may be releasably coupled to the club head 2110 along the recessed portion 2180.
  • the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F are disposed in pairs along the recessed portion 2180.
  • the pairs of protruding bodies 2170 A, B, C, D, E, F define the discrete attachment locations for securing a weight to the recessed portion 2180.
  • the pairs of protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F can be separated from adjacent pairs of protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F by a distance of greater than 0.2 inches, greater than 0.3 inches, greater than 0.4 inches, greater than 0.5 inches, greater than 0.8 inches, greater than 1.0 inches, greater than 1.25 inches, greater than 1.5 inches, greater than 2.0 inches, greater than 2.5 inches, greater than 3.0 inches, greater than 3.5 inches, or greater than 4.0 inches.
  • a first pair 2171 of the protruding bodies 2170A, B is positioned near the toe end 2118 of the recessed portion 2180
  • a second pair 2175 of the protruding bodies 2170E, F is positioned near the heel end 2122 of the recessed portion 2180
  • a third pair 2173 of the protruding bodies 2170C, B between toe and heel ends 2118, 2122 of the recessed portion 2180.
  • the protruding bodies 2170A, C, E of the first, second and third pair 2171, 2173, 2175 of protruding bodies can comprise any distance between the corresponding protruding bodies 2170B, D, F of the first, second and third pair 2171, 2173, 2175.
  • the protruding bodies 2170 A, B, C, D, E, F making up and of the first, second or third pair of protruding bodies 2171, 2173, 2175 can be separated by a distance of less than 1.0 inches, less than 0.75 inches, less than 0.5 inches, less than 0.4 inches, less than 0.3 inches, less than 0.2 inches, or less than 0.1 inches.
  • the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 2170 A, B, C, D, E, F or to the pairs of protruding bodies 2171, 2173, 2175 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F are ribs.
  • the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F are shaped as ribs which extend from the wall 2183 along the recessed surface 2181 towards the trailing edge 2172. Further, the protruding bodies 2170 A, B, C, D, E, F comprise a maximum height near the wall 2183 and taper towards the recessed sole 2130 as they extend towards the trailing edge. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2170 may have an L-shaped rib profile (as opposed to the straight rib profile illustrated in FIGS. 40 and 42).
  • the L-shaped rib profile extends away from the wall 2183 along the recessed surface 2181 towards the back end 2138.
  • the protruding bodies 2170 may form a pair having oppositely-facing L-shaped profiles which are configured to receive and/or engage and hold a weight.
  • the protruding bodies 2170 may form a pair having facing L-shaped profiles which are configured to receive and/or engaged and a hold a weight.
  • the recessed portion 2280 can be considered the same or similar to the recessed portion 2180, except that the protruding bodies 2270A, B, C, D, E of the recessed portion 2280 comprise a various shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 2270 A, B forming a pair 2271 near the toe end 2218 of the recessed portion 2280 comprise an L-shaped rib profile.
  • the protruding bodies 2270A, B are similar to the protruding bodies 2170 of FIG. 42 except the L-shaped profile extends away from the recessed portion 2281.
  • the protruding bodies 2270C, 2270D forming the pair 2275 between the toe and heel end 2218, 2222 of the recessed portion 2280 comprise an L- shaped rib profile.
  • the protruding bodies 2270C, D are similar to the protruding bodies 2170 of FIG. 42 except the rib extending from the recessed surface 2281 is not perpendicular with the recessed surface 2281.
  • the protruding body 2270E is positioned near the heel end 2222 of the recessed portion 2280.
  • the protruding body 2270 is in the shape of an elongated rib extending perpendicular from to the recessed surface 2281 and being spaced from the wall 2183.
  • the elongated rib of the protruding body 2170E forms a curvature, which is opposite the curvature of the trailing edge 2272. Additionally, the elongated rib of the protruding body 2170E comprises at least on notch extending inward the rib. In other embodiments, elongated rib of the protruding body 2270E can extend in a linear fashion across the recessed surface 2281. In other embodiments, the protruding body 2270E can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or six notches configured to secure a weight. Further, it should be noted that in the illustrated embodiment, some of the protruding bodies 2270A, B, C, D form pairs 2271, 2275, while other protruding bodies 2270E do not form pairs.
  • FIG. 44 another embodiment of a protruding body 2270F is illustrated.
  • the protruding body is similar to the protruding bodies 2170 A, B, C, D, E, F extending substantially perpendicularly from both the wall 2283 and the recessed surface 2281. Further, the protruding body 2270F tapers from near the wall 2283 towards the trailing edge 2272. However, in contrast to the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F the protruding body 2270F comprises a slot 2296.
  • the slot 2296 may be used to secure a weight to the club head 2210 (e.g., with a snap-fit arrangement).
  • the protruding body 2270F can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 slots 2296.
  • a recessed portion 2380 comprising protruding bodies 2370A, B, C is illustrated.
  • the recessed portion 2380 can be considered the same or similar to the recessed portion 2180, 2280, however, the protruding bodies 2370 A, B, C have a different shape than any of the aforementioned protruding bodies 2170, 2270.
  • the protruding bodies 2370A, B, C comprise a T-shaped rib profile.
  • the protruding bodies 2370 A, B, C can be T-shaped rib having a two-step rib extending towards the wall 2383.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2370 A, B, C may have an I-shaped structure (as opposed to T-shaped as in FIGS. 45 and 46).
  • each of the protruding bodies 2170, 2270, 2370 or pair of protruding bodies 2171, 2173, 2175, 2271, 2275 can be configured to receive and/or engage and secure a weight (not shown).
  • the weight can include a notch, a slot or an aperture corresponding with the shapes and or features discussed above with respect to the protruding bodies 2170, 2270, 2370.
  • the weight can be devoid of an aperture or slots, or notches.
  • the weights can be configured to be couple to the protruding bodies 2170, 2270, 2370 through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
  • each of the aforementioned adjustable weighting systems 2166, 2266, 2366 may be strategically positioned on the pairs of protruding bodies 2171, 2172, 2175 to achieve a desired club head 2110 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias.
  • a heavier weight is positioned on the third protruding body pair 2175, located between the toe or toe end 2118 and the heel or heel end 12122, while lighter weights are positioned on the first and second protruding bodies 2171, 2173 near the toe or toe end 2118 and the heel or heel end 2122.
  • the aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 2134 of the club head 2110.
  • a heavier weight is positioned on the second protruding body pair 2173 near the heel or heel end 2122, while lighter weights are positioned on the first protruding body pair 2171 near the toe or toe end 2118 and on the third protruding body 2175 that is located between the toe or toe end 21 18 and the heel or heel end 2122.
  • the aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 2122 of the club head 2110.
  • a heavier weight is positioned on the first protruding body pair 2171 near the toe or toe end 21 18, while lighter weights are positioned on the second protruding body pair 2173 near the heel or heel end 2122 and on the third protruding body pair 2175 that is located between the toe or toe end 2118 and the heel or heel end 2122.
  • the aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 2118 of the club head 2110.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies pairs 2171, 2173, 2175 are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies pairs 2171, 2173, 2175.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies pairs 2171, 2173, 2175 can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body pairs 2171, 2173, 2175 has its own corresponding weight or set of weights.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2166, 2266, 2366 of golf club head 2110, 2210, 2310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2166, 2266, 2366 of golf club head 2110, 2210, 2310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 2110, 2210, 2310 having the adjustable weighting system 2166, 2266, 2366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 48-50 illustrate a club head 2410 having a club head body 2414.
  • the club head 2410 includes an adjustable weighting system 2466 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 2410 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2466 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 2410 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 2466.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2466 ensures that shifts in the club head 2410 CG occur mainly in a heel end 2422 to toe end 2418 direction keeping the overall club head 2410 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2466 can comprise a channel 2413.
  • the channel 2413 comprises a third surface 2413 that can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2466 includes a third surface 2413 comprising three discrete attachment locations.
  • the three discrete attachment locations each comprising a feature in the form of a protruding body 2470A, B, C.
  • the protruding bodies, 2470A, B, C can receive one or more weight 2482.
  • the channel 2413 extends from near the toe end 2418 in an arcuate manner to a point between the toe end 2418 and the heel end 2422.
  • the channel 2413 generally follows the contour of the trailing edge 2472.
  • the channel 2413 is defined by a first surface 2473, a second surface 2474 disposed opposite the first surface
  • the channel 2413 includes a depth measured as the distance between the third surface 2413 and the sole 2430 of the club head 2410 (or the height of the first surface 2473).
  • the channel 2413 has a constant depth along its length from the toe end 2418 to a point between the toe and heel end 2418, 2422.
  • the channel 2413 can have an increasing, decreasing or constant depth along its length from the toe end 2418 to the heel end 2422.
  • the channel 2413 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 2466 remains low profile.
  • the channel 2413 has a maximum depth of 0.24 inches.
  • the channel 2413 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.24, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches.
  • the depth of the channel 2413 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.24, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches.
  • the channel 2413 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 2473 and the second surface 2474. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 2413 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 2413 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches.
  • the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.24, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
  • the channel 2413 can include one or more protruding bodies 2470 defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 2410.
  • the channel 2413 includes three protruding bodies 2470 A, B, C.
  • the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C, are shown as cylindrical post comprising external threads.
  • the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C can be an aperture, recess, ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches, tabs, cutout regions, ribs, grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the channel 2413 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten protruding bodies 2470.
  • protruding bodies 2470A, B, C are disposed within the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C.
  • a first protruding body 2470A is positioned at or near the toe end 2418 of the channel 2413
  • a second protruding body 2470C is positioned at or near the heel end 2422 of the channel 2413
  • a third protruding body 2470B is positioned between the toe and heel end 2418, 2422 of the channel 2413.
  • the protruding bodies 2470 A, B, C can be positioned on the first surface 2473 of the channel 2413.
  • the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C can be positioned on the first surface 2473 and the third surface2413 of the channel 2413.
  • the weights 2482 have a generally cylindrical shape correspond with the cylindrical shape of the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C.
  • the internal portion of the weight can include internal threads configured to engage with the external threads on the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C.
  • the weights 2482 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the channel 2413.
  • the weights 2482 each include a tool receiving aperture 2487 that receives a tool to tighten and/or loosen the weights 2482.
  • tool receiving aperture 2487 has a generally star shape.
  • the weights 2482 include tool receiving apertures 2487 of different sizes, or include a head portion having an outer shape (e.g., hexagonal) that is configured to engage with a tool to facilitate tightening and/or loosening of the weights 4582 (e.g., with a torque wrench that clicks into place once a weight is secured).
  • the adjustable weighting system 2466 comprises two weights 2482.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2466 can comprise one, three or five weights 2482 corresponding with the number of protruding bodies 2470 A, B, C.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2466 can comprise more or less weights 2482 than the number of protruding bodies 2470A, B, C.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2466 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten weights 2482.
  • each of the weights 2482 can have the same shape and size.
  • the weights 2482 can vary in shape and size, resulting in weights 2482 having varying masses.
  • the weights 2482 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 2482 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 2482 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic.
  • the weights 2482 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 2482 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 2482. In some embodiments, each of the weights 2482 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 2482 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 2482 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 2482 may vary between 0. l-50g. For example, in
  • one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-1 Og, one or more of the weights 2482 may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights 2482 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 2482 may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights 2482 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 2482 may vary between 0-1 Og
  • a second weight 2482 may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight 2482 may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight 2482 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 2482 may vary between l-5g, and a second and third weight 2482 may vary between 5-30g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 2482 may vary between 1-lOg, and a third and fourth weight 2482, may vary between 5-24g. In some embodiments, a first weight 2482 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2482 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2482 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 2482 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2482 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2482 each have a mass of 0.75 grams.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10, 1 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 , 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50g.
  • one of the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C receives a weight 2482, while the remaining protruding bodies 2470A, B, C are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure.
  • each of the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C receives a weight 2482.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C receives more than one weight 2482.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C does not extend past an outer profile of the club head 2410, such that even if the protruding body2470A, B, is left bare and uncovered, the protruding body2470A, B, C, and or channel 2413 will not interfere with or disrupt a golfer's swing.
  • the weights 2482 may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies2470A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 2410 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias.
  • a heavier weight 2482 is positioned on the third protruding body 2470B, located between the toe or toe end 2418 and the heel or heel end 2422, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding bodies 2470A, B near the toe or toe end 2418 and the heel or heel end 2422.
  • the aforementioned weight 2482 positions results in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 2434 of the club head 2410.
  • a heavier weight 2482 is positioned on the second protruding body 2470B near the heel or heel end 2422, while lighter weights 2482 are positioned on the first protruding body 6270 A near the toe or toe end 2418 and on the second protruding body 2470B that is located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322.
  • the aforementioned weight 2482 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 2422 of the club head 2410.
  • a heavier weight 2482 is positioned on the first protruding body 2470A near the toe or toe end 2418, while lighter weights 2482 are positioned on the second protruding bodies 6270D near the heel or heel end 2422 and on the third protruding body 2470C that is located between the toe or toe end 2418 and the heel or heel end 2422.
  • the aforementioned weight 2482 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 2418 of the club head 2410.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies2470A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 2470A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 2482 or set of weights 2482.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2466 of golf club head 2466 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2466 of golf club head 2466 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 2466 having the adjustable weighting system 2466 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 51-52 illustrate a club head 2510 having a club head body 2514.
  • the club head 2510 includes an adjustable weighting system 2566 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 2510 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2566 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 2510 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 2566.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 2566 ensures that shifts in the club head 2510 CG occur mainly in a heel end 2522 to toe end 2518 direction keeping the overall club head 2510 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2566 can comprise a recessed portion 2580.
  • the recessed portion 2580 comprises a recessed surface 2581 that can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2566 includes a recessed surface 2581 comprising three discrete attachment locations.
  • the three discrete attachment locations each comprising a feature in the form of a protruding bodies 2570A, B, C. Further, the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C can be configured to receive a weight 2582.
  • the recessed portion 2580 extends from near the toe end 2518 in an arcuate manner to a point between the toe end 2518 and the heel end 2522.
  • the recessed portion generally follows the contour of the trailing edge 2572.
  • the recessed portion 2580 is defined by a recessed surface 2581 being offset from the sole 2520 of the club head 2510 by a wall 2583.
  • the recessed surface 2581 extends substantially parallel to the sole 2530 of the club head 2510 while the wall 2583 generally extends substantially perpendicular to the recessed surface 2581.
  • the wall 2583 can extend at an angle between the recessed surface 2581 and the sole 2530.
  • the recessed portion 2581 includes a depth measured as the distance between the recessed surface 2581 and the sole 2530 of the club head 2510 (or the height of the wall 2583).
  • the recessed portion 2580 has a constant depth along its length from the toe end 2518 to the heel end 2522. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2580 can have an increasing, decreasing or constant depth along its length from the toe end 2518 to the heel end 2522.
  • the weight 2582 may be concealed by the wall 2583.
  • a portion of the weight 2582 may protrude outward from the wall 2583.
  • the channel 2513 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 2566 remains low profile.
  • the recessed portion 2580 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2580 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches.
  • the depth of the recessed portion 2580 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches.
  • the recessed portion 2580 includes a width measured as the distance between the wall 2583 and the trailing edge 2572 or back end 2534. In the illustrated embodiments, the recessed portion 2580 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2580 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width.
  • the width can be less than 2.0 inches.
  • the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches.
  • the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
  • the recessed portion 2580 can include one or more protruding bodies 2570 defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 2510. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the recessed portion 2580 includes three protruding bodies 2570A, B, C. The protruding bodies 2570A, B, C, are shown as cylindrical post comprising external threads.
  • the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C can be an aperture, recess, ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches, tabs, cutout regions, ribs, grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the recessed portion 2580 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten protruding bodies 2570.
  • the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C are disposed within the recessed portion 2580 along the recessed surface 2581 such that one or more weights
  • a first protruding body 2570A is positioned at or near the toe end 2518 of the recessed portion 2580
  • a second protruding body 2570C is positioned at or near the heel end 2522 of the recessed portion 2580
  • a third protruding body 2570B is positioned between the toe and heel end 2518, 2522 of the recessed portion 2580.
  • the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C can be positioned on the wall
  • the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C can be positioned on the wall 2583 and the recessed surface 2581 of the recessed portion 2580.
  • the weights 2582 have a generally cylindrical shape correspond with the cylindrical shape of the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C.
  • the internal portion of the weight can include internal threads configured to engage with the external threads on the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C.
  • the weights 2582 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the recessed portion 2580.
  • the weights 2582 each include a tool receiving aperture 2587 that receives a tool to tighten and/or loosen the weights 2582.
  • tool receiving aperture 2587 has a generally star shape.
  • the weights 2582 include tool receiving apertures 2587 of different sizes, or include a head portion having an outer shape (e.g., hexagonal) that is configured to engage with a tool to facilitate tightening and/or loosening of the weights 2582 (e.g., with a torque wrench that clicks into place once a weight is secured).
  • an outer shape e.g., hexagonal
  • the adjustable weighting system 2566 comprises two weights 2582.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2566 can comprise one, three or five weights 2582 corresponding with the number of protruding bodies 2570A, B, C.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2566 can comprise more or less weights 2582 than the number of protruding bodies 2570A, B, C.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2566 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine ot ten weights 2582.
  • each of the weights 2582 can have the same shape and size.
  • the weights 2582 can vary in shape and size, resulting in weights 2582 having varying masses.
  • the weights 2582 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 2582 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 2582 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic.
  • the weights 2582 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 2582 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 2582.
  • each of the weights 2582 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 2582 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 2582 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 2582 may vary between 0. l-50g. For example, in
  • one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-1 Og, one or more of the weights 2582 may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights 2582 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 2582 may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights 2582 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 2582 may vary between 0-lOg
  • a second weight 2582 may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight 2582 may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight 2582 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 2582 may vary between l-5g, and a second and third weight 2582 may vary between 5-30g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 2582 may vary between 1-lOg, and a third and fourth weight 2582, may vary between 5-25g. In some embodiments, a first weight 2582 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2582 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2582 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 2582 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2582 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2582 each have a mass of 0.75 grams.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10, 1 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 , 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50g.
  • one of the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C receives a weight 2582, while the remaining protruding bodies 2570A, B, C are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure.
  • each of the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C receives a weight 2582.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C receives more than one weight 2582.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C does not extend past an outer profile of the club head 2510, such that even if the protruding body 2570A, B, is left bare and uncovered, the protruding body2570A, B, C, and or recessed portion 2580 will not interfere with or disrupt a golfer's swing.
  • the weights 2582 may be strategically positioned on the protruding
  • a heavier weight 2582 is positioned on the third protruding body 2570B, located between the toe or toe end 2518 and the heel or heel end 2522, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding bodies 2570A, B near the toe or toe end 2518 and the heel or heel end 2522.
  • the aforementioned weight 2582 positions results in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 2534 of the club head 2510.
  • a heavier weight 2582 is positioned on the second protruding body 2570B near the heel or heel end 2522, while lighter weights 2582 are positioned on the first protruding body 6270A near the toe or toe end 2518 and on the second protruding body 2570B that is located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322.
  • the aforementioned weight 2582 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 2522 of the club head 2510.
  • a heavier weight 2582 is positioned on the first protruding body 2570A near the toe or toe end 2518, while lighter weights 2582 are positioned on the second protruding bodies 6270D near the heel or heel end 2522 and on the third protruding body 2570C that is located between the toe or toe end 2518 and the heel or heel end 2522.
  • the aforementioned weight 2582 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 2518 of the club head 2510.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies2570A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 2570A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 2582 or set of weights 2582.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2566 of golf club head 2566 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2566 of golf club head 2566 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 2566 having the adjustable weighting system 2566 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 53 and 54 illustrate a club head 2610 having a club head body 2614.
  • the club head 2610 includes an adjustable weighting system 2666 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 2610 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2666 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 2610 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 2666.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 2666 ensures that shifts in the club head 2610 CG occur mainly in a heel end 2622 to toe end 2618 direction keeping the overall club head 2610 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2666 can comprise a recessed portion 2680.
  • the recessed portion 2680 comprises a recessed surface 2681 that can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2666 includes a recessed portion 2680 comprising three discrete attachment locations.
  • the three discrete attachment locations each having a 3 features in the form of one protruding body 2670 A, B, C and two protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F.
  • the recessed portion 2680 extends from a first end 2685 near the toe end 2618 of the golf club head 2610 in an arcuate manner to a second end 2684 near the heel end 2622 of the club head 2610. Generally, the recessed portion 2680 follows the contour of the trailing edge 2672.
  • the recessed portion 2680 is defined by a recessed surface 2681 being offset from the sole 2620 of the club head 2610 by a wall 2683. Generally, the recessed surface 2681 extends substantially parallel to the sole 2630 of the club head 2610 while the wall 2683 generally extends substantially perpendicular to the recessed surface 2681.
  • the wall 2683 can extend at an angle between the recessed surface 2681 and the sole 2630.
  • the recessed portion 2681 includes a depth measured as the distance between the recessed surface 2681 and the sole 2630 of the club head 2610 (or the height of the wall 2683).
  • the recessed portion 2680 has a constant depth along its length from the toe end 2618 to the heel end 2622.
  • the recessed portion 2680 can have an increasing, decreasing or constant depth along its length from the toe end 2618 to the heel end 2622.
  • the recessed portion 2680 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 2666 remains low profile.
  • the adjustable weight system 2666 remains low profile.
  • the recessed portion 2680 has a maximum depth of 26 inches. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2680 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.26, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed portion 2680 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.26, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches.
  • the recessed portion 2680 includes a width measured as the distance between the wall 2683 and the trailing edge 2672 or back end 2634.
  • the recessed portion 2680 includes a constant width.
  • the recessed portion 2680 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width.
  • the width can be less than 2.0 inches.
  • the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.26, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches.
  • the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
  • the protruding bodies 2670 A, B, C may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 2670 A, B, C (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 2670 A, B, C are protruding ribs, each having an aperture 2671.
  • the protruding bodies 2670 A, B, C have other shapes (e.g., with circular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or any other shapes).
  • a second one of the protruding bodies 2670C is located generally at a heel or heel end 2622 of the club head 2610, a first one of the protruding bodies 2670A is located generally at a toe or toe end 2618 of the club head 2610, and a third body 2670B is located generally between the heel or heel end 2622 and the toe or toe end 2618.
  • more or less than three protruding bodies 2670 are provided, for example at locations different than that illustrated.
  • five protruding bodies 2670 are provided, with one of the protruding bodies 2670 being located generally at the heel or heel end 2622, one of the protruding bodies 2670 being located at the toe or toe end 2618, and the other three protruding bodies 2670 being located between the heel or heel end 2622 and the toe or toe end 2618.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2666 includes six additional protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F, although other embodiments include different numbers of additional protruding ribs 2675.
  • each of the three protruding bodies 2670A, B, C are positioned adjacent (and generally opposite to) two of the additional protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F.
  • a first two of the additional protruding ribs2675A, C are located generally at the toe end 2618 of the club head 2610
  • a third two of the additional protruding ribs 2675E, F are located generally at the heel 2622 of the club head 2610
  • I % 2675C, D are located generally between the heel or heel end 2622 and the toe or toe end 2618.
  • Each of the protruding bodies 2670 A, B, C in combination with a pair of protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 2610.
  • the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C and the protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F are configured to receive weights 2682, and to hold the weights 2682.
  • the weight 2682 is moved (e.g., slid) into an area between two of the protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F, such that the protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F act as guides located on opposite sides of the weight 2682, and such that the weight 2682 is positioned adjacent to or in contact with the protruding body 2670A, B, C and its corresponding aperture 2671 A, B, C.
  • the weight 2682 includes a set of internal threads (e.g., in a blind borehole in the weight 2682).
  • a fastener 2673 is inserted through the aperture 2671 and into engagement with the internal threads of the weight 2682.
  • the fastener 2673 includes a head 2676 that is larger than the aperture 2671, such that when the fastener 2673 is tightened, the head 2676 presses against the protruding body 2670A, B, C, and the weight 2682 is pressed against the outer surface 2674, thereby holding the weight 2682 within the recessed portion 2680.
  • the fastener 2673 includes a receiving geometry (e.g., a slot or opening on the head 2676), and the receiving geometry mates with a fastening tool (e.g., torque wrench) to tighten or loosen the fastener 2673.
  • a fastening tool e.g., torque wrench
  • the fastener 2673 is comprised of a density that is less than or equal to the density of the club head 2610.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C and the additional protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F are disposed on other surfaces in the recessed portion 2680.
  • the recessed portion 2680 can further include three more protruding bodies 2670D, E, F extending from the rear surface 2681.
  • each of the protruding bodies 2679D, E, F extend perpendicular to the rear surface 2681 and are positioned adjacent to the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C and/or the protruding ribs 2675 A, B, C, D, E, F.
  • the additional protruding bodies 2670D, E, F can further support the weight 2682 from shifting along the X-axis 62 (FIG. 2).
  • the additional protruding bodies 2670D, E, F can further comprise apertures 2671D, E, F similar to the apertures 2671 A, B, C.
  • the weight 2682 may be any shape such as a cube, or any variation thereof.
  • the weight 2682 is made at least partially of steel, tungsten, aluminum, titanium, vanadium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, other metals, metal alloys, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, only a portion of the weight 2682 is positioned within the recessed portion 2682 when the weight 2682 is coupled to the club head 2610.
  • the weights 2682 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 2682 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 2682 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic.
  • the weights 2682 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 2682 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 2682.
  • each of the weights 2682 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass.
  • the weights 2682 may vary in both volume and material from one another.
  • one of the structures labeled as 2682 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap- fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C.
  • the weights 2682 may vary between 0. l-50g.
  • one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-lOg, one or more of the weights 2682 may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights 2682 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 2682 may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights 2682 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 2682 may vary between 0-lOg
  • a second weight 2682 may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight 2682 may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight 2682 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 2682 may vary between l-5g, and a second and third weight 2682 may vary between 5-3 Og. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 2682 may vary between 1-lOg, and a third and fourth weight 2682, may vary between 5-26g. In some embodiments, a first weight 2682 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2682 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2682 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 2682 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2682 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2682 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. .
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25- 2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0. l-50g.
  • the weights 2682 may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 2610 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias.
  • a heavier weight 2682 is positioned on the third protruding body 2670B, located between the toe or toe end 2618 and the heel or heel end 2622, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding bodies 2670A, B near the toe or toe end 2618 and the heel or heel end 2622.
  • the aforementioned weight 2682 positions results in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 2634 of the club head 2610.
  • a heavier weight 2682 is positioned on the second protruding body 2670B near the heel or heel end 2622, while lighter weights 2682 are positioned on the first protruding body 6270 A near the toe or toe end 2618 and on the second protruding body 2670B that is located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322.
  • the aforementioned weight 2682 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 2622 of the club head 2610.
  • a heavier weight 2682 is positioned on the first protruding body 2670A near the toe or toe end 2618, while lighter weights 2682 are positioned on the second protruding bodies 6270C near the heel or heel end 2622 and on the third protruding body 2670B that is located between the toe or toe end 2618 and the heel or heel end 2622.
  • the aforementioned weight 2682 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 2618 of the club head 2610.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 2670 A, B, C.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 2670A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 2682 or set of weights 2682.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2666 of golf club head 2666 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2666 of golf club head 2666 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 2666 having the adjustable weighting system 2666 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 55-58 illustrate a club head 2710 (and a variation thereof in FIG. 160A) having a club head body 2714.
  • the club head 2710 includes an adjustable weighting
  • I % system 2766 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 2710 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2766 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 2710 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 2766. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 2766 ensures that shifts in the club head 2710 CG occur mainly in a heel end 2722 to toe end 2718 direction keeping the overall club head 2710 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2766 can comprise a recessed portion 2780.
  • the recessed portion 2780 comprises a recessed surface 2781 that can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2766 includes a recessed surface 2781 comprising three discrete attachment locations.
  • the three discrete attachment locations include 3 features in the form of protruding bodies 2770 A, B, C.
  • the recessed portion 2780 extends from a first end 2785 near the toe end 518 of the golf club head 2710 in an arcuate manner to a second end 2784 near the heel end 2722 of the club head 2710. Generally, the recessed portion 2780 follows the contour of the trailing edge 2772.
  • the recessed portion 2780 is defined by a recessed surface 2781 being offset from the sole 2720 of the club head 2710 by a wall 2783. Generally, the recessed surface 2781 extends substantially parallel to the sole 2730 of the club head 2710 while the wall 2783 generally extends substantially perpendicular to the recessed surface 2781.
  • the wall 2783 can extend at an angle between the recessed surface 2781 and the sole 2730.
  • the recessed portion 2781 includes a depth measured as the distance from the recessed surface 2781 to the sole 2730 in a direction perpendicular to the recessed surface 2781 (or the height of the wall 2783).
  • the recessed portion 2780 has a constant depth.
  • the recessed portion 2780 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 2718 to the heel end 2722.
  • the weight 2782 when a weight 2782 is coupled to the club head 2710 in one region of the recessed portion 2780, the weight 2782 may be concealed by the wall 2783.
  • a portion of the weight 2782 may protrude outward from the wall 2783.
  • the recessed portion 2780 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 2766 remains low profile.
  • the recessed portion 2780 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches.
  • the recessed portion 2780 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches.
  • the depth of the recessed portion 2780 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches.
  • the recessed portion 2780 includes a width measured as the distance between the wall 2783 and the trailing edge 2772 or back end 2734. In the illustrated embodiments, the recessed portion 2780 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2780 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width.
  • the width can be less than 2.0 inches.
  • the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches.
  • the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
  • the recessed portion 2780 can include one or more protruding bodies 2770A, B, C each defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 2782 to the club head 2710.
  • the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C each defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 2782 to the club head 2710.
  • the recessed portion 2780 includes three protruding bodies 2770A, B, C.
  • the protruding bodies 2770 may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 2770 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights).
  • the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C are protruding ribs, each having a slot 2771 A, B, C.
  • the slot 2771 A, B, C extends inward from the top surface of the protruding body 2770 having a varying width.
  • the slot 2771 A, B, C can comprise internal threads configured to receive a threaded fastener (not show).
  • the slot 2771 A, B, C can be a smooth surface configured to have a threaded fastener fed through the slot 2771 A, B, C to be received in a weight 27821 ⁇ other embodiments, the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C can be a protruding body, aperture, recess, ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches, tabs, cutout regions, ribs, grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the recessed portion 2780 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten protruding bodies 2770.
  • the protruding bodies 2770 can have any shape.
  • the protruding bodies 2770 can be cylindrical, triangular, rectangular, ovular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape.
  • the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E are disposed within the recessed portion 2780 along the recessed surface 2781 such that one or more weights 2782 may be releasable coupled to the club head 2710 along the recessed portion 2780. More specifically, a first protruding body 2770A is positioned near the first end 2785 or the toe end 2718, a second protruding body 2770C is positioned near the second end 2784 or the heel end 2722, a third protruding body 2770B is positioned between the first and second end 2785, 2784 or between the toe and heel end 2718, 2722.
  • the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C extend from the recessed surface 2781 at or near the trailing edge 2772, such that there is a gap between the protruding body 2770A, B, C, and the wall 2783 configured to receive a weight 2782.
  • Each of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 2710.
  • the protruding bodies 2770 A, B, C, D, E can be positioned on the wall 2783 of the recessed portion 2780.
  • the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C can be positioned on the wall 2783 and the recessed surface 2781 of the recessed portion 2780.
  • the weights 2782 have a generally rectangular shape corresponding with the shape of the gap between the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C and the wall 2783. In other embodiments, the weights 2782 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the recessed portion 2780. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 2766 comprises one weight 2782. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 2766 can comprise three or five weights 2782 corresponding with the number of protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2766 can comprise more or less weights 2782 than the number of protruding bodies 2770A, B, C,D, E.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2766 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten weights 2782.
  • the weight 2782 comprises a protrusion 2775 configured to slide into a corresponding slot 2771 A, B, C.
  • the weight 2782 and protrusion 2775 are sized and shaped to frictionally engage a portion of the wall 2783 and/or a portion of the protruding body 2770A, B,C and corresponding slot 2771 A, B, C.
  • the weight 2782 and protrusion 2775 snaps into the slot 2771 A, B, C.
  • the slot 2771 A, B, C has varying widths, such that the protrusion 2775 of the weight 2782 initially presses apart material on either side of the slot 2771 A, B, C as the protrusion 2775 slides down the slot 2771 A, B, C, until the slot 2771 A, B, C widens. The material then returns to secure the weight 2782 and the protrusion 2775.
  • the weights 2782 can comprise apertures extending entirely through the weight 2782 sized and configured to receive a threaded fastener (not shown).
  • the apertures can be positioned on the weight 2782 such that they align with the slots 2771 A, B, C of the protruding bodies 2770 A, B, C.
  • the screw fastener can be thread through the slot 2771 A, B, C and be received or engage the aperture on the corresponding weight 2782, thus securing the weight 2782 to the recessed portion 2780.
  • the weight 2782 is sized and shaped to frictionally engage a portion of the wall 2783 and/or a portion of the protruding body 2770A, B, C.
  • the weight 2782 snaps into the slot 2771 A, B, C.
  • the weight 2782 can comprise a protrusion instead of an aperture configured to be received within the slot 2771.
  • the slot 2771 A, B, C has varying widths, such that the protrusion initially presses apart material on either side of the slot 2771 A, B, C as the protrusion 2775 slides down the slot 2771, until the slot 2771 widens. The material then returns to secure the weight 2782.
  • one or more of the weights 2782 can be a swing weight that includes an extension 2786 that extends out of the recessed portion 2780 and over a portion of the sole or bottom 2730.
  • the sole or bottom 2730 can includes at least one aperture 2787.
  • the weight 2782 includes a locking structure 2788 on the extension 2786 that is configured to extend into the aperture 2787 to further couple and lock the weight 2782 to the club head 2710.
  • the locking structure 2788 is a fastener that extends from or through the extension 2786 and into the aperture 2787 in the sole or bottom 2730.
  • the aperture 2787 is threaded to receive the fastener.
  • multiple apertures 2787 are provided, to permit the weight 2782 to be moved to various locations on the club head 2710.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2766 includes a variety of weights 2782.
  • a first one of the weights 2782 is a swing weight with the extension 2786 as described above, and a second one of the weights 2782 does not include the extension 2786.
  • the second weight 2782 may be moved as desired to or from the first protruding bodies 2770 A, at the toe or toe end 2718 and to or from the protruding body 2770 at the heel or heel end 2722.
  • one of the weights 2782 are coupled to and fit over at least a portion of another one of the weights 2782.
  • the weight 2782 illustrated as a swing weight in FIGS. 56-58 i.e., the weight 2782 having the extension 2786
  • two of the weights 2782 are coupled together first prior to insertion into the recessed portion 2780. For example, one of the smaller weights 2782 in FIGS.
  • one or more of the weights 2782 does not include the protrusion 2775, so as to facilitate fitting such a weight 2782 within another one of the weights 2782.
  • one of the protrusions 2775 e.g., the protrusion on the larger swing weight 2782 in FIGS. 56-58
  • one of the weights 2782 includes a slot, or other opening, that slides over the protrusion 2775 of another one of the weights 2782.
  • Other embodiments include various other manners of coupling one weight 2782 over at least a portion of another weight 2782.
  • each of the weights 2782 can have the same shape and size.
  • the weights 2782 can vary in shape and size, resulting in weights 2782 having varying masses.
  • the weights 2782 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 2782 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 2782 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic.
  • the weights 2782 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 2782 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 2782.
  • each of the weights 2782 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 2782 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 2782 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 2782 may vary between 0. l-50g. For example, in
  • one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-1 Og, one or more of the weights 2782 may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights 2782 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 2782 may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights 2782 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 2782 may vary between 0-1 Og
  • a second weight 2782 may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight 2782 may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight 2782 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 2782 may vary between l-5g, and a second and third weight 2782 may vary between 5-3 Og. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 2782 may vary between 1-lOg, and a third and fourth weight 2782, may vary between 5-25g. In some embodiments, a first weight 2782 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2782 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2782 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 2782 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2782 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2782 each have a mass of 0.75 grams.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10, 1 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50g.
  • one of the protruding bodies 6270A, B, C, D, E receives a weight 2782, while the remaining protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure.
  • each of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E receives a weight 2782.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C receives more than one weight 2782.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E does not extend past an outer profile of the club head 2710, such that even if the protruding body 2770A, B, C, D, E is left bare and uncovered, the protruding body 2770A, B, C, D, E and or recessed portion 2780 will not interfere with or disrupt a golfer's swing.
  • the weights 2782 may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 2770 A, B, C, D, E to achieve a desired club head 2710 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias.
  • a heavier weight 2782 is positioned on the protruding body 2770C, located between the toe or toe end 2718 and the heel or heel end 2722, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding bodies 2770 A,B, D, E near the toe or toe end 2718 and the heel or heel end 2722.
  • the aforementioned weight 2782 positions results in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 2734 of the club head 2710.
  • a heavier weight 2782 is positioned on the protruding body 2770E and/or 2770D near the heel or heel end 2722, while lighter weights 2782 are positioned on the protruding body 6270 A, B near the toe or toe end 2718 and on the protruding body 2770C that is located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322.
  • the aforementioned weight 2782 positions result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 2722 of the club head 2710.
  • a heavier weight 2782 is positioned on the protruding body 2770A and/or 2770B near the toe or toe end 2718, while lighter weights 2782 are positioned on the protruding bodies 6270D, E near the heel or heel end 2722 and on the protruding body 2770C that is located between the toe or toe end 2718 and the heel or heel end 2722.
  • the aforementioned weight 2782 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 2718 of the club head 2710.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E has its own corresponding weight 2782 or set of weights 2782.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2766 of golf club head 2766 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 2766 of golf club head 2766 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 2766 having the adjustable weighting system 2766 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 67-68 illustrate a club head 3010 having a club head body 3014.
  • the club head 3010 includes an adjustable weighting system 3042 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 3010 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3042 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 3010 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 3042.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3042 ensures that shifts in the club head 3010 CG occur mainly in a heel end 3022 to toe end 3018 direction keeping the overall club head 3010 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3042 can comprise a channel 3046.
  • the channel 3046 comprises a back wall 3066 that can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3042 includes a back wall 3066 comprising three discrete attachment locations.
  • Each discrete attachment location comprises a feature in the form of a protruding body 2470A, B, C Further, the protruding bodies, 2470 A, B, C can receive one or more weight 2482.
  • the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 comprises a top wall 3058, a bottom wall 3062 opposite the top wall 3058, a back wall 3066, an inner wall 3070 opposite the back wall 3066, a first sidewall 3067, and a second sidewall 3068 opposite the first sidewall 3067.
  • the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 further comprises a top lip 3074 and a bottom lip 3078.
  • the top lip 3074 extends from the crown 3018 toward the sole 3022, and the bottom lip 3078 extends from the sole 3022 toward the crown 3018.
  • An opening 3082 is created between the top lip 3074 and the bottom lip 3078, wherein the opening 3082 comprises an opening distance 3086.
  • the top lip 3074 and the bottom lip 3078 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 prevent the adjustable weight 3050 from being removed from the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042.
  • the protruding bodies 3054 of the adjustable weight system 3042 are configured to be received by the adjustable weight 3050.
  • the protruding bodies 3054 of the adjustable weight system 3042 extend perpendicular from the back wall 3066 of the channel 3046 toward the opening 3082 of the adjustable weighting system 3042.
  • the protruding bodies 3054 can comprise at least 1 protruding body 3054, at least 2 protruding bodies 3054, at least 3 protruding bodies 3054, at least 4 protruding bodies 3054, at least 5 protruding bodies 3054, or at least 6 protruding bodies 3054.
  • the protruding bodies 3054 can be evenly spaced apart from a heel end 3030 to a toe end 3026 within the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042; while in other embodiments, some of the protruding bodies 3054 are not evenly spaced apart. In some embodiments, the protruding bodies 3054 can be spaced out in increments from one another, concentrated near the toe end 3026, near the heel end 3030, bordering the crown 3018, the sole 3022, or the crown 3018 and sole 3022. For example, two protruding bodies 3054 are positioned near the toe end 3026, while one protruding body 3054 is positioned near heel end 3030, or all three protruding 3054 bodies are positioned near the heel end 3030.
  • Each of the protruding bodies 3070A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 3010.
  • the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the protruding bodies 3054 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 can further comprise a cross-sectional shape.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the protruding bodies 3054 can be cylindrical.
  • the protruding bodies 3054 can have a square cross-section, a rectangular cross-section, a triangular cross-section, or any other shaped cross-section.
  • the protruding bodies 3054 can comprise the same cross-sectional shape.
  • all three protruding bodies 3054 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 can comprise a cylindrical cross- sectional shape as illustrated in FIG. 62. While in other embodiments, the protruding bodies 3054 can comprise different cross-sectional shapes.
  • the protruding bodies 3054 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 can further still comprise a material.
  • the material of the protruding bodies 3054 can be steel, tungsten, aluminum, titanium, vanadium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, other metals, metal alloys, composite polymer material, non-metallic materials, polymer components, or any combination thereof.
  • the material of the protruding bodies 3054 can further be a programmed magnet.
  • the adjustable weight 3050 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 comprises a first component 3090, and a second component 3094 non adjacent to the first component 3090.
  • the adjustable weight 3050 can comprise a third component 3098 extending from the first component 3090 and being received within the second component 3094.
  • the first component 3090 of the adjustable weight 3050 comprises a width 3102 greater than the opening distance 3086 of the channel 3046, thus preventing the adjustable weight 3050 from being removed from the club head 3010.
  • the back surface 3106 of the first component 3090 of the adjustable weight 3050 comprises a recess 3114 to be configured to receive the protruding bodies 3054.
  • the recess 3114 of the first component 3090 comprises a cross-sectional shape that is complimentary to the cross-sectional shape of the protruding bodies 3054.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the recess 3114 can be cylindrical to house a cylindrical protruding body 3054.
  • the recess 3114 can comprise a square cross-section, a rectangular cross-section, a triangular cross-section, or any other shape to be complimentary to the cross-sectional shape of the protruding bodies 3054.
  • the first component 3090 further comprises a material.
  • the material of the first component 3090 can be steel, tungsten, aluminum, titanium, vanadium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, other metals, metal alloys, composite polymer material, non-metallic materials, polymers components, or any combination thereof.
  • the material of the first component 3090 can further be a programmable magnet.
  • a programmable magnet is a magnetic structure that is coded with distinctive correlating patterns with alternating polarity, designed to achieve a desired behavior. The different desired behaviors achieved by the programmable magnet are aligning, attaching, latching, and spring.
  • the programmable magnets used herein are coded to display spring-like behaviors.
  • the programmed magnets comprise an equilibrium point wherein the programmed magnets either repel or attract one another to constantly reach this equilibrium point. If the programmed magnets were be pushed together, they would repel, and if they were pulled apart, they would attract.
  • the programmed magnet can be coded to comprise an equilibrium point as described above, but can be further coded to attract and attach when the programmed magnets are aligned in a certain configuration relative to one another.
  • the first component comprises a programmable magnet material.
  • the second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 comprises a front surface 3118, a back surface 3122, facing the front surface 3118 of the first component 3090, and an aperture 3126 housing the third component 3098.
  • the second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 further comprises a minimum width 3130 and a maximum width 3134.
  • the minimum width 3130 of the second component 3094 is less than the opening distance 3086 of the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042.
  • the maximum width 3134 of the second component 3094 is greater than the opening distance 3086 of the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042.
  • the second component 3094 further comprises a material.
  • the material of the second component 3094 can be steel, tungsten, aluminum, titanium, vanadium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, other metals, metal alloys, composite polymer material, non-metallic materials, polymer components, or any combination thereof.
  • the material of the second component 3094 can further be a programmable magnet similar to the spring-like programmed magnet as described above.
  • the third component 3098 of the adjustable weight 3050 is a cylindrical rod comprising a first end 3138 and a second end 3142.
  • the first end 3138 of the third component 3098 is configured to be attached to the front surface 3110 of the first component 3090.
  • the second end 3142 of the third component 3098 is configured to be received within the aperture 3126 of the second component 3094, wherein the second component 3094 is rotatable about the third component 3098.
  • the second component 3094 can further move along the third component 3098 from the second end 3142 toward the first end 3138.
  • the third component 3098 of the adjustable weight 3050 further comprises a material.
  • the material of the third component 3098 can be steel, tungsten, aluminum, titanium, vanadium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, other metals, metal alloys, composite polymer material, non-metallic materials, polymer components, or any combination thereof.
  • the adjustable weight 3050 can further comprise a fourth component 3146 positioned between the first component 3090 and the second component 3094 and housing a portion of the third component 3098.
  • the fourth component 3146 comprises a first end 3150 and a second end 3152.
  • the first end 3150 of the fourth component 3146 is attached to the front surface 31 10 of the first component 3090, and the second end 3154 of the fourth component 3146 is attached to the back surface 3122 of the second component 3094.
  • the fourth component 3146 further comprises a material having a spring constant.
  • the material having a spring constant can be a spring or elastomer with resistance when compressed.
  • the first and second components 3090 and 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 can comprise the same material.
  • the first component 3090 of the adjustable weight 3050 can comprise a different material than the second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050.
  • the third component 3098 can comprise a different material than the first and second component 3090 and 3094, or the same material as the first component 3090, the second component 3094, or both the first and second component 3090 and 3094.
  • the first and second components 3090 and 3094 comprise a programmable magnet
  • the first component 3090 and the second component 3094 are programmed to have spring like behaviors.
  • the adjustable weight 3050 is at equilibrium (first component 3090 and second component 3094 are at a constant distance from one another).
  • the adjustable weight 3050 is trying to reach equilibrium.
  • the second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 repels against the first component 3090 of the adjustable weight 3050.
  • first and second components 3090 and 3094 comprise a programmable magnet
  • the first component 3090 and the second component 3094 are programmed to have spring like behaviors.
  • the adjustable weight 3050 is at equilibrium (as described above), when the first and second component 3090 and 3094 are aligned in one configuration, and are attracted to one another and attached, when the second component 3094 is rotated to be aligned in another configuration relative to the first component 3090.
  • the fourth component 3146 provides the adjustable weight 3050 springlike behaviors as described above.
  • the adjustable weight 3050 is at equilibrium (first component 3090 and second component 3094 are at a constant distance from one another).
  • the fourth component 3146 expands against the first component 3090 and the second component 3094 to regain equilibrium.
  • the adjustable weight 3050 is housed within the channel 3046 of the adjustable weight system 3042. As illustrated in FIG. 71, the adjustable weight 3050 is in a first configuration 3158, wherein no force is acting on the second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 to compress or expand relative to the first component 3090 of the adjustable weight 3050. In the first configuration 3158 of the adjustable weight 3050, minimum width 3130 of the second component 3094 is parallel to the opening distance 3086 of the channel 3046; while the maximum width 3134 of the second component 3094 is perpendicular to the opening distance 3086 of the channel 3046.
  • the first configuration 3158 allows the adjustable weight 3050 to be positioned anywhere along the channel 3046 wherein a protruding body 3054A, B, C exists..
  • the recess 3114 on the back surface 3106 of the first component 3090 receives one of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C.
  • a tool is then applied to the second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 to transition the adjustable weight 3050 into a second configuration 3162 as illustrated in FIG. 72.
  • the tool pushes the second component 3094 beyond the top and bottom lip 3074 and 3078, and rotates the second component 3094 about the third component 3098.
  • the maximum width 3134 of the second component 3094 is parallel to the opening distance 3186 of the opening 3082 of the channel 3046 and the minimum width 3130 of the second component 3094 is perpendicular to the opening distance 3186 of the opening 3082 of the channel 3046.
  • the front surface 3118 of the second component 3094 abuts the inner wall 3070 of the top and bottom lip 3074 and 3078. Because the adjustable weight 3050 is programmed to exhibit spring-like behaviors, the first and second component 3090 and 3094 repel each other, creating a press fit of the adjustable weight 3050 within the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042.
  • the second configuration 3162 of the adjustable weight 3050 secures the adjustable weight 3050 onto the protruding bodies 3054 within the channel 3046, thus preventing the movement of center of gravity and moment of inertia post adjustment.
  • the tool can also transition the adjustable weight 3050 back into the first configuration 3158.
  • the tool further compresses the second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 toward the first component 3090 of the adjustable weight 3050, and then rotates the second component 3094 about the third component 3098 into the first configuration.
  • the front surface 3118 of the second component 3094 no longer abuts the inner wall 3070 of the top and bottom lip 3074 and 3078, thus not creating a press fit of the adjustable weight 3050 within the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042.
  • the adjustable weight 305 can reposition within the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 to another one of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C.
  • the adjustable weight 3050 comprises a first, a second, a third and a fourth component 3090, 3094, 3098, and 3146.
  • the first component 3090 and the second component 3094 comprise a material that is not a programmable magnet.
  • the adjustable weight 3050 is modified from a first configuration 3158 to a second configuration 3162 in a similar fashion using the tool as described above.
  • the fourth component 3146 is compressed and thus pushes against the first and second component 3090 and 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050.
  • the pushing of the fourth component 3146 on the first and second component 3090 and 3094 creates a press fit within the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042.
  • the press fit of the adjustable weight 3050 within the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 secures the adjustable weight 3050 onto one of the protruding bodies and thus prevent the center of gravity and moment of inertia from changing post adjustment.
  • the adjustable weight 3050 comprises a first and a second component 3090 and 3094 void of a third component 3098 positioned between the first and second components 3090 and 3094.
  • the first component 3090 and the second component 3094 comprise a material that is a programmable magnet.
  • the protruding bodies 3054 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 comprise a material that is a programmable magnet.
  • the adjustable weight 3050 When the adjustable weight 3050 are at an equilibrium point, the adjustable weight 3050 can be positioned anywhere along the channel 3046 of the adjustable weight 3042 system corresponding with the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C. When positioning the adjustable weight 3050 within the channel 3046 in a desired location for CG and MOI, the adjustable weight 3050 can be positioned over one of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C. Using a tool, the second component 3094 can then be rotated to be aligned in another configuration relative to the first component 3090, wherein the first component 3090, the second component 3094 and the protruding body 3054 positioned underneath the recess 3114 on the back surface 3106 of the first component 3090 attract one another and attach at that distinct location within the channel 3046.
  • one of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C receives an adjustable weight 3050.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C receives an adjustable weight 3050, while the remaining protruding bodies 3054A, B, C are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C receives more than one adjustable weight 3050.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 3054 A, B, C does not extend past an outer profile of the club head 10, such that even if the protruding body 3054A, B, C is left bare and uncovered, the protruding body 3054A, B, C and or channel 3046 will not interfere with or disrupt a golfer's swing.
  • each of the adjustable weights 3050 is illustrated having the same shape and size.
  • the adjustable weights 3050 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different adjustable weights 3050 having varying masses.
  • the adjustable weights 3050 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass.
  • one adjustable weight 3050 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining adjustable weights 3050 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic.
  • the adjustable weights 3050 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one adjustable weight 3050 may have a greater volume than the remaining adjustable weights 3050.
  • each of the adjustable weights 3050 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the adjustable weights 3050 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 3082 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C. In some embodiments, the adjustable weights 3050 may vary between 0.1-50g.
  • one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-lOg, one or more of the adjustable weights 3050 may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the adjustable weights 3050 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the adjustable weights 3050 may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the adjustable weights 3050 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 0-lOg
  • a second adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 10-20g
  • a third adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first adjustable weight 3050 may vary between l-5g, and a second and third adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 5-30g. In other embodiments, a first and second adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 1-1 Og, and a third and fourth adjustable weight 3050, may vary between 5-25g. In some embodiments, a first adjustable weight 3050 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third adjustable weight 3050 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first adjustable weight 3050 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third adjustable weight 3050 each have a mass of 1.5 grams.
  • a first adjustable weight 3050 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third adjustable weight 3050 each have a mass of 0.75 grams.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15-25g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 , 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50g.
  • the adjustable weights 3050 may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 3054 A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 3010 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias.
  • a heavier adjustable weight 3050 is positioned on the protruding body 3054B, located between the toe or toe end 3018 and the heel or heel end 3022, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding bodies 3054A, C near the toe or toe end 3018 and the heel or heel end 3022.
  • the aforementioned adjustable weight 3050 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 3034 of the club head 3010.
  • a heavier adjustable weight 3050 is positioned on the protruding bodies 3054C near the heel or heel end 3022, while lighter adjustable weights 3050 are positioned on the protruding body 3054A near the toe or toe end 3018 and on the protruding body 3054B that is located between the toe or toe end 3018 and the heel or heel end 3022.
  • the aforementioned adjustable weight 3050 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 3022 of the club head 3010.
  • a heavier adjustable weight 3050 is positioned on the protruding body 3054A near the toe or toe end 3018, while lighter adjustable weights 3050 are positioned on the protruding body 3054C near the heel or heel end 3022 and on the protruding body 3054B that is located between the toe or toe end 3018 and the heel or heel end 3022.
  • the aforementioned adjustable weight 3050 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 3018 of the club head 3010.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 3054 A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C.
  • one or more of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding bodies 3054 A, B, C has its own corresponding adjustable weight 3050 or set of adjustable weights 3050.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3066 of golf club head 3066 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3066 of golf club head 3066 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 3066 having the adjustable weighting system 3066 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10-20g, 10- 25g, or 15- 25g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5g, 0.25-5g, 0.25-7.5g, 0.25 to lOg.
  • a first weight can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams.
  • any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0. l-50g.
  • FIGS. 59-62 illustrate further concepts of protruding bodies that may be used.
  • FIG. 59 illustrates a threaded protruding body 2870
  • FIG. 60 illustrates a protruding body 2970 having a shape designed to be held by a chuck (e.g., collet chuck)
  • FIG. 61 illustrates a protruding body 3070 having a flat surface 3071
  • FIG. 62 illustrates a protruding body 3170 that forms a rail.
  • Each of these protruding bodies may be used to receive and hold one or more weights on a club head.
  • FIGS. 63-66 illustrate further concepts of weights that may be used.
  • FIG. 63 illustrates a weight 2882 with a threaded aperture 2886 to couple to a threaded protruding body (e.g., the protruding body 2870 in FIG. 59)
  • FIG. 64 illustrates the concept of using a chuck (e.g., collet chuck) on a weight 2982 to couple to a protruding body (e.g., the protruding body 2970 in FIG. 60)
  • FIG. chuck e.g., collet chuck
  • FIG. 65 illustrates the concept of using a set screw and a flat to couple a weight 3082 to a protruding body (e.g., the protruding body 3070 in FIG. 61), and FIG. 66 illustrates the concept of using a ball bearing and a set screw to couple a weight 3182 to a protruding body (e.g., by screwing in the set screw to force the ball bearing against a portion of the weight and the protruding body to hold the weight onto the protruding body).
  • FIGS. 74-77 illustrate a club head 3210 having a club head body 3214.
  • the club head 3210 can be similar to the club head bodies mentioned above.
  • the club head 3210 includes an adjustable weighting system 3266 comprising a cable 3269 and a tensioner 3267 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 3210 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3266 is positioned within a recessed portion 3280 of the club head 3210.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3266 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 3210 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 3266. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 3266 ensures that shifts in the club head 3210 CG occur mainly in a heel end 3222 to toe end 3218 direction keeping the overall club head 3210 CG in a low and back location.
  • the recessed portion 3280 is positioned on a portion of a sole or bottom 3230 of the club head 3210.
  • the recessed portion 3280 is generally along the back portion perimeter of the club head 3210.
  • the recessed portions 3280 comprises a portion of a heel end 3222, a portion of a rear 3276, and a portion of a toe end 3218 of the club head 3210 of the sole 3230 wherein the recessed portion 3280 forms a U-shape on the sole 3230.
  • the recessed portion 3280 can form other shapes as well.
  • the recessed portion 3280 comprises a recessed surface 3281.
  • the recessed portion 3280 may comprise a recessed surface 3281 along a crown or top of the club head 3210.
  • the recessed surface 3281 is separated from a remainder of an outer surface 3274 of the sole 3230 by a wall 3283 (FIG. 75).
  • the wall 3283 is, at least along portions thereof, perpendicular (or in some embodiments inclined/declined at a different angle) to the recessed surface 3281.
  • the recessed portion 3280 includes a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 3270 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the features 3270 of the recessed portion 3280 are defined as indentations within the wall 3283 adjacent a trailing edge 3272, wherein the features 3270 can comprise a portion of the wall 3283.
  • the features 3270 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 3282 to the club head 3210.
  • each of the features 3270 form an indent with three walls from the wall 3283, wherein a profile of each feature 3270 is a trapezoidal shape.
  • each of the features 3270 form an indent with any number of walls (e.g., two, three, four, five, six, or seven walls), wherein each of the features 3270 is any profile shape (e.g., triangular, square, trapezoidal, rectangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, heptagonal, or octagonal).
  • the features 3270 can form one singular curved wall into the wall 3283, wherein the indent is a partial circle.
  • the recessed portion 3280 includes four features 3270, a first feature 3270A near the toe end 3218, a second feature 3270D near the heel end 3222, a third feature 3270B between the first feature 3270A and the second feature 3270D, and a fourth feature 3270C between the second feature 3270D and the third feature 3270B.
  • other embodiments can comprise different numbers of features 3270 (e.g., one feature 3270, two features 3270, three features 3270, four features 3270, five features 3270, six features 3270, seven features 3270, eight features 3270, etc.).
  • two of the features 3270 are located generally at the heel end 3222 of the club head 3210, and the remaining two features 3270 are located generally at the toe end 3218 of the club head 3210, wherein the position of the features 3270 is symmetrical from the heel end 3222 to the toe end 3218. In other embodiments, the position of the features 3270 is not symmetrical.
  • the recessed portion 3280 can comprise any number combination of features on the heel end 3222, and the toe end 3218.
  • the recessed portion 3280 can comprise two features 3270 in the heel end 3222 and one feature on the toe end 3218, or the recessed portion 3280 can comprise three features 3270 on both the heel end 3222, and the toe end 3218.
  • the features 3270 are configured to receive weights 3282.
  • the different positions of the features 3270 in the recessed portion 3280 allow for adjustment of the center of gravity based on the different positioning and distribution of the weights 3282.
  • the weights 3282 comprise a top surface 3287, a bottom surface 3288, and sidewalls 3289.
  • the weights 3282 further comprise a general cross-sectional shape such as a cylinder, a triangular prism, a cube, a rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or etc.
  • the weights 3282 can comprise an I-beam like cross-sectional shape. In other embodiments as illustrated in FIG.
  • the weights 3282 can comprise a circular cross-sectional shape. In many embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the weights 3282 are complimentary to the profile shape of the features 3270. As illustrated in FIG. 74, the club head 3210 comprises one weight 3282. In other embodiments, the club head 3210 can comprise more than one weight 3282, such as one weight 3282, two weights 3282, three weights 3282, four weights 3282, five weights 3282, six weights 3282, seven weights 3282, or eight weights 3282.
  • the weights 3282 further comprise a mass.
  • the mass of the weights 3282 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to
  • the weights 3282 can be 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
  • the weights 3282 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses.
  • the club head 3210 comprises three weights 3282 with the first weight 3282 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 3282 having a mass of 5 grams.
  • the club head 3210 comprises four weights 3282 with the first weight 3282 having a mass of 20 grams, the second weight 3282 having a mass of 15 grams, the third weight 3282 having a mass of 10 grams, and the fourth weight 3282 having a mass of 7 grams.
  • the weights 3282 can further comprise a groove 3271.
  • the groove 3271 is positioned on one of the sidewalls 3289 of the weights 3282.
  • the groove 3271 is oriented parallel to the top and bottom surface 3287 and 3288.
  • the grooves 3271 comprise a partial circle shape.
  • the weights 3282 is void of the groove 3271 and can comprise an aperture extending through a center of the weights 3282 instead.
  • the apertures is oriented parallel to the top and bottom surface 3287 and 3288.
  • the groove 3271 or aperture are configured to receive the cable 3269 of the adjustable weighting system 3266.
  • the weights 3282 can be void of the groove 3271 and comprise ribs configured to receive the cable 3269.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3266 is positioned within the recessed portion 3280 on the sole 3230 of the club head body 3214. As stated above, the adjustable weighting system 3266 comprises the tensioner 3267 and the cable 3269 configured to be attached to the tensioner 3267. As illustrated in Fig. 74, the tensioner 3267 is positioned in a general center adjacent the trailing edge 3272 on the recessed surface 3281. In other embodiments the tensioner 3267 can be positioned at other locations on the recessed surface 3281 (e.g., near the toe end 3218, near the heel end 3222, more central on the sole 3230 distal from the trailing edge 3272, etc.).
  • the tensioner 3267 can be attached to the club head 3210 by way of fastener, protrusions, hooks, adhesive or by other attachment means. When the tensioner 3267 is attached to the recessed portion 3280 of the club head 3210, the tensioner 3267 does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 3210 when at address. In some embodiments, the tensioner 3267 can be flush with the outer surface 3274 of the sole 3230.
  • the tensioner 3267 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism, wherein the winch and ratchet mechanism reels in a cable and comprises an automatic locking system when it rotates clockwise, preventing counterclockwise movement without user input.
  • the tensioner 3267 is configured to be attached to the cable 3269.
  • the tensioner 3267 can be rotated to manipulate the amount of the cable 3269 is free, wherein when the tensioner 3267 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3269 winds up around the tensioner 3267.
  • the winch and ratchet mechanism prevents the tensioner from rotating counterclockwise, therefore preventing the cable 3269 from unwinding.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3266 can comprise a tensioner, wherein the tensioner is a J-slot tensioner 3267A as illustrated in FIG. 74A.
  • the J-slot tensioner 3267A comprises a top surface 3290, a bottom surface 3291, and a side surface 3293.
  • the bottom surface 3291 of the J-slot tensioner comprises cable receiving geometry 3294, configured to receive the cable 3269.
  • the top surface 3290 comprises a protrusion 3295 configured to receive a tool (not shown) to rotate the J-slot tensioner 3267A.
  • the top surface 3290 can comprise a protrusion 3295 of any shape, or can comprise a bore, or blind aperture configured to receive any rotating tool.
  • the side surface 3293 of the J-slot tensioner 3267A comprises two J-slot 3296 (one on the opposite side of the other, and in inversed directions) extending upward from the bottom surface 3291, continuing laterally parallel to the top and bottom surfaces 3290 and 3291, and extending slightly downward toward the bottom surface 3291, forming a "J" shape.
  • the J-slot tensioner 3267A and the cable 3269 can be coupled to the club head 3210 at a tensioner housing (not pictured), wherein a spring washer (not pictured) is disposed between the club head 3210 and the J-slot tensioner 3267A.
  • the protrusions of the tensioner housing is configured to be received within the J-slots 3296.
  • the spring washer pushes on the J-slot tensioner 3267A, wherein the protrusion of the tensioner housing prevents the J-slot tensioner 3267A from rotating (first orientation).
  • the J-slot tensioner 3267A can be pressed downward and rotated clockwise to tighten the cable 3269.
  • the spring washer then pushes on the J-slot tensioner 3267A, wherein the protrusions of the tensioner housing is positioned at the end of the J-slot 3296, preventing the J-slot tensioner 3267A from rotating (second configuration).
  • the J-slot tensioner 3267A can be incorporated into any of the adjustable weighting systems defined hereon after comprising a cable to secure the weights.
  • the cable 3269 of the adjustable weighting system 3266 is configured to be receive by the tensioner 3267, and runs along the wall 3283 of the recessed portion 3280, held in place by guide elements 3275.
  • the cable 3269 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope.
  • the cable 3269 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
  • the club head body 3210 includes one or more guide elements 3275 (e.g., hooks, protrusions, rails etc.) that receive and guide the cable 3269 along the features 3270, and retain the cable 3269 within the recessed portion 3280.
  • the guide elements 3275 extend from the wall 3282 toward the recessed surface 3281.
  • the guide elements 3275 are disposed between each of the features 3270.
  • the club head body 3210 comprises six guide elements 3275.
  • the club head body can comprise less than, or more than six guide elements 3275 (e.g., one guide element 3275, two guide elements 3275, three guide elements 3275, four guide elements 3275, five guide elements 3275, six guide elements 3275, seven guide elements 3275, eight guide elements 3275, nine guide elements 3275, or ten guide elements 3275).
  • six guide elements 3275 e.g., one guide element 3275, two guide elements 3275, three guide elements 3275, four guide elements 3275, five guide elements 3275, six guide elements 3275, seven guide elements 3275, eight guide elements 3275, nine guide elements 3275, or ten guide elements 3275).
  • the tensioner 3267 can be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3269.
  • the tensioner 3267 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3269 winds around the tensioner 3267 and is tightened, increasing the cable tension.
  • the tightened cable 3269 presses on the groove 3271 of the weights 3282.
  • the sidewalls 3289 of the weights 3282 abut against the features 3270, wherein the weights 3282 can be flush with the outer surface 3274 of the sole 3230.
  • the weights 3282 when the sidewalls 3289 of the weights 3282 abut against the features 3270, the weights 3282 can extend past the outer surface 3274 of the sole 3230, however, still do not extend past the lowest point of the club head 3210 when at address. In other embodiments still, when the sidewalls 3289 of the weights 3282 abut against the features 3270, the weights 3282 do not extend to, or past the outer surface 3274 of the sole 3230. In other embodiments, the cable 3269 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 3267.
  • the tensioner 3267 When the tensioner 3267 is in a released orientation (i.e., pressed downward, or pulled upward), the cable 3269 unwinds from the tensioner 3267, wherein the tension in the cable 3269 decrease. As the tension in the cable 3269 decreases, the cable 3269 loosens and the weights 3282 are no longer pressed against the features 3270. The weights 3282 can then be repositioned by an end user to different features 3270 in the recessed portion 3280 and secured into place by manipulating the tensioner 3267 as stated above. In embodiments where the weights 3282 comprise an aperture instead of the groove 3271, the weights 3282 can be slid along the cable 3269 to reposition the weights 3282, without being removed from the cable 3269.
  • the weights 3282 reconfigures the center of gravity (CG) of the club head 3210.
  • the weights 3282 can be positioned in the second feature 3270D near the toe end 3218 to shift the CG toward the toe end 3218 to correct ball trajectory for players who are typically slice a ball.
  • the weights 3282 can be positioned in the feature 3270A near the heel end 3222 to shift the CG toward the heel end 3222 to correct ball trajectory for players who typically hook the ball.
  • the tensioner 3267 is in a naturally locked position wherein the tensioner 3267 can be pressed downward to engage rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to loosen the cable 3269.
  • the tensioner 3267 can be rotated clockwise to tighten and generate a desired tension to hold the weight or weights 3282 in place in the features 3270. To loosen the cable and release the tension from the weights 3282, the tensioner 3267 pressed downward toward the club head 3210. When the tension is released (i.e., when the cable 3269 is loosen/extended), the cable 3269 can be removed from the groove 3271 of the weight or weights 3282, and the weight or weights 3282 can then be removed entirely from the club head 3210. The weight or weights 3282 can then be repositioned into a different feature 3270 along the club head 3210, in order to change the CG of the club head 3210.
  • the tensioner 3267 can be pulled upward and rotated clockwise to tighten the weights 3282.
  • the tensioner 3267 is automatically locked and is prevented in rotating counterclockwise (i.e., unwinding the cable 3269).
  • the tensioner 3267 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 3267 is pulled upward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to loosen the cable 3269.
  • a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3267 to release and/or increase tension in the cable 3267.
  • the club head 3210 having the adjustable weighting system 3266 comprising the tensioner 3267 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 3269 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3266 allows for the club head 3210 to adjust the already low and back CG about the x-axis (heel- to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x- axis allows for players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
  • the club head 3210 having the tensioner 3267 and the cable 3269 adjustable weight system 3266 further has an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps).
  • the weight(s) 3282 coupled to the club head 3210 are secured by the tension of the cable 3269, which create a friction between a surface of the weight(s) 3282 and the recessed surface 3281 of the club head 3210.
  • the tension and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 3210 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 3282. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure.
  • the mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 3210 to increase strength and/or mass in that location.
  • the tension and friction created by the cable 3269 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3282 and club head 3210 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener.
  • the lack of the screw-type fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
  • the cable 3269 of the adjustable weighting system 3266 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated in a number of different patterns on an outer surface 3274 of the club head 3210.
  • the different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3282 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3230 because the weight(s) 3282 are not limited to specific weight housing structures.
  • the number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players.
  • the cable 3269 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3269 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3210.
  • the material and pattern of the cable 3269 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3269 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3266 of golf club head 3210 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3266 of golf club head 3210 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 3210 having the adjustable weighting system 3266 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 78-81 illustrate a club head 3310 having a club head body 3314.
  • the club head 3310 includes an adjustable weighting system 3366 positioned comprising a cable 3369 and a tensioner 3367 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 3310 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various parameters
  • the adjustable weighting system 3366 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 3310 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 3366. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 3366 ensures that shifts in the club head 3310 CG occur mainly in a heel end 3322 to toe end 3318 direction keeping the overall club head 3310 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3366 is positioned on a sole 3330 of the club head 3310.
  • the sole 3330 of the club head 3310 comprises a plurality of channels 3213 that are interconnected.
  • the channels 3213 extend radially from a central location on the sole 3330 toward a trailing edge 3372 of the golf club head 3310 near a toe end 3318, a rear 3323, and a heel end 3222.
  • the channel 3213 can extend radially from any location on the sole 3330 toward the trailing edge 3372 of the golf club head 3310.
  • the channels 3213 are connected proximal the trailing edge 3372 in a zigzag like pattern, wherein the channels 3213 form polygonal sectioned portions 3311.
  • the outer surface of the polygonal sectioned portions 3311 is flush with the outer surface 3374 of the sole 3330.
  • the polygonal sectioned portions 3311 are raised portions extending past the contour of the outer surface 3374 of the sole 3330, however, does not extend past the lowest portion of the club head 3310 when at address.
  • the channels 3213 are separated from the polygonal sectioned portions 3311 and the remainder of the sole 3330 by a wall 3383.
  • the wall 3383 is, at least a portion thereof, perpendicular (or in some embodiments inclined/declined at a different angle) to the channels 3213.
  • the club head 3310 comprises six channels 3213, with five of the six channels 3213 extending radially.
  • a first channel 3213A is positioned near the toe end 3318
  • a second channel 3213E is positioned near the heel end 3322
  • a third channel 3213B positioned between the first channel 3213A and the second channel 3213E
  • a fourth channel 3213D positioned between the second channel 3213E
  • a fifth channel 3213C positioned between the third channel 3213B, the fourth channel 3213D
  • a sixth channel 3213F (or trailing edge channel 3213F) interconnecting all the radially extending channels 3213.
  • the club head 3310 can comprise any number of channels 3213, such as one channel 3213, two channels 3213, three channels 3213, four channels 3213, five channels 3213, six channels 3213, seven channels 3213, eight channels 3213, or nine channels 3213.
  • the channels 3213 system includes a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 3370 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the features 3370 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 3382 to the club head 3310. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the features 3370 of the channels 3213 are defined as indentations within the walls 3383 of the channel 3213 near the trialing edge 3372. As illustrated in FIGS. 78 and 79, each of the features 3370 form an indent with three walls within the wall 3383, wherein each feature 3370 has a profile of a trapezoidal shape. In other embodiments, each of the features 3370 form an indent with any number of walls within the wall 3383 to form a profile shape (e.g., triangular, square, trapezoidal, rectangular, rectangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, heptagonal, or octagonal). In other embodiments, the features 3370 can form one singular curved wall into the wall 3383, wherein the indent is a partial circle.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3366 includes four features 3370, a first feature 3370A near the toe end 3318, a second feature 3370D near the heel end 3322, a third feature 3370B between the first feature 3370A and the second feature 3370D, and a fourth feature 3370C between the second feature 3370D and the third feature 3370B.
  • features 3370 e.g., one feature 3370, two features 3370, three features 3370, four features 3370, five features 3370, six features 3370, seven features 3370, or eight features 3370, etc.
  • the features 3370 can be positioned at the wall 3383 of the channel 3213 adjacent the trailing edge 3372. In other embodiments, the features 3370 can be positioned at the wall 3383 adjacent the polygonal sectioned portions 3311 as illustrated in FIG. 78. In other embodiments still, the features 3370 can be positioned in a combination at the wall 3383 adjacent the trailing edge 3372, and at the wall 3383 adjacent the polygonal sectioned portions 3311. In one embodiment, the features 3370 can be spaced evenly apart, wherein the position of the feature 3370 is symmetrical from the toe end 3318 to the heel end 3322.
  • two of the features 3370 are located generally at the heel end 3322 of the club head 3310, and two of the features 3370 are located generally at the toe end 3318 of the club head 3310.
  • the position of the features 3370 is asymmetrical, wherein the features 3370 can be positioned more near the toe end 3318, more near the heel end, 3322, or more near the rear 3323.
  • the channel 3213 can comprise three features 3370 near the heel end 3322, and one feature 3370 near the toe end 3318. The different positions of the features 3370 allow for adjustment of the CG based on the different positioning and distribution of the weights 3382.
  • the weights 3382 of the club head 3310 can be similar to the weights 3282 of the club head 3210.
  • the weights 3382 are configured to be received within the features
  • the weights 3382 comprise a top surface 3387, a bottom surface 3388, and sidewalls 3389.
  • the weights 3382 further comprise a general cross- sectional shape such as a cylinder, a triangular prism, a cube, a rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or etc.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the weights 3382 are complimentary to the profile shape of the features 3370.
  • the club head 3310 can comprise any number of weight 3382.
  • the club head 3310 can comprise one weight 3382, two weights 3382, three weights 3382, four weights 3382, five weights 3382, six weights 3382, seven weights 3382, or eight weights 3382.
  • the weights 3382 are flush with the outer surface 3374 of the sole 3330.
  • the weight 3382 can extend past the outer surface 3374 of the sole 3330, but not past the lowest point of the club head 3310 is at address. In other embodiments still, the weight 3382 does not extend to or past the outer surface 3374 of the sole 3330.
  • the weights 3382 further comprise a mass.
  • the mass of the weights 3382 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams.
  • the weights 3382 can be 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
  • the weights 3382 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses.
  • the club head 3310 comprises three weights 3382 with the first weight 3382 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 3382 having a mass of 5 grams.
  • the club head 3310 comprises four weights 3382 with the first weight 3382 having a mass of 20 grams, the second weight 3382 having a mass of 15 grams, the third weight 3382 having a mass of 10 grams, and the fourth weight 3382 having a mass of 7 grams.
  • the weight 3382 can further comprise a groove 3371.
  • the groove 3371 is positioned on one of the sidewalls 3389 of the weights 3382, oriented parallel to the top and bottom surface 3387 and 3388, and is configured to receive the cable 3369.
  • the groove 3371 has a C-shaped (or other shaped) contour, so as to retrieve and facilitate retention of the cable 3369.
  • the adjustable weighting mechanism 3366 comprises the tensioner 3367 and the cable 3369.
  • the tensioner 3367 is positioned in a general center location on the sole 3330, disposed at a junction of where the channels 3213 radially extend. Although in other embodiments the tensioner 3367 can be positioned at other locations along the sole 3330 of the club head 3310, as long as the tensioner 3367 is disposed at a junction of wherein the channels 3213 radially extend.
  • the tensioner 3367 can be attached to the club head 3310 by way of fastener or by an adhesive.
  • the tensioner 3367 When the tensioner 3367 is attached to the club head 3310, the tensioner 3367 does not extend past the lowest part of the club head 3310 when at address, thereby not obstructing a player's swing. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3367 can be flush with the outer surface 3374 of the sole 3330.
  • the cable 3369 of the adjustable weighting system 3366 is similar to the cable 3269 of the adjustable weighting system 3266 (e.g., material, etc.).
  • the cable 3369 is configured to be received be the tensioner 3367 and the channels 3213.
  • the cable 3369 is receive within the first channel 3213A, along the trailing edge channel 3213F, and within the second channel 3213E, wherein the inner channels 3213 (third fourth, and fifth channels 3213B, 3213C, and 3213D) are void of the cable 3369.
  • the inner channels 3213 (third fourth, and fifth channels 3213B, 3213C, and 3213D) comprise a protrusion the entire length of the inner channels 3213.
  • the cable 3369 can be repositioned to be receive by any of the inner channels 3213.
  • a club head 3310 comprising five channels 3213 extending radially from the tensioner 3367, and the cable 3369 is positioned in the first channel 3213A, in the trailing edge channel 3213F, and in the fourth channel 3213D.
  • the cable 3369 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope.
  • the cable 3369 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
  • the tensioner 3367 is similar to the tensioner 3267 of the club head 3210, wherein the tensioner acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism configured to receive the cable 3369.
  • the tensioner 3367 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above.
  • the tensioner 3367 can be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3369.
  • the cable 3369 is coupled to (to include being pressed against) the groove 3371 or aperture of the weights 3382, and extends within one or more of the various channels 3313 defined along the bottom or sole 3330.
  • each weight 3382 has a shape and size that generally complements the shape and size of the feature 3370, such that surfaces of the weight 3382 fit tightly against the wall 3383 and prevents the weights 3382 from shifting within the channel 3213.
  • the cable 3369 can be tightened by other means other than by the tensioner 3367.
  • the tensioner 3367 can (pulled upward and/or pressed downward) to decrease the tension in the cable 3369. As the tension decreases in the cable 3369, the cable loosens and the weights 3382 can then be repositioned (or slid for the weights 3382 with the apertures) to different features 3370 on the sole 3330 to adjust the CG. For example, the weights 3382 can be repositioned to from the third feature 3370B to the second feature 3370D near the heel end 3322 to correct ball flight for a player who typically hooks the ball. In some embodiments, during adjustment of the weight 3382, a portion of the cable 3369 can be moved to a different channel 3313, depending upon a number of weights 3282 being used. In other embodiments, the cable 3369 can be loosen by other means other than by the tensioner 3367.
  • the tensioner 3367 is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3367 is pressed downward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism to loosen the cable 3369.
  • the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 3369 is extended)
  • the cable 3369 may be removed from the groove 3371 of the weight 3382, and the weight 3382 may then be removed entirely from the club head 3310.
  • Thw weight 3382 can than be repositioned into a different, discrete feature 3370 along the club head 3310, in order to change a CG of the club head 3310.
  • the tensioner is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3367 is pulled upward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism to loosen the cable 3369.
  • the tensioner is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3367 is pulled upward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism to loosen the cable 3369.
  • a tool is required to engage and rotate the tensioner 3367 and/or to release tension in the cable 3367.
  • the club head 3310 having the adjustable weighting system 3366 comprises the tensioner (or other adjustment means) and the cable described above can optimize the performance of the golf club.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3366 allows for the club head 3310 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to- toe end), and about the y-axis (strikeface-to-rear) without having to sacrifice a relatively high (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows for players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory, while shifting the CG about the y-axis allows for players to control the spin imparted on a ball.
  • the club head 3310 having the tensioner 3367 and the cable 3369 adjustable weight system 3366 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps).
  • the weight(s) 3382 coupled to the club head 3310 are secured by the tension of the cable 3369, which create a friction between the surfaces of the weight(s) 3382 and a surface of the features 3370.
  • the tension and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 3310 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 3382. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure.
  • the mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 3310 to increase strength and/or mass in that location.
  • the tension and friction created by the cable 3369 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3382 and the club head 3310 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener.
  • the lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
  • the cable 3369 of the adjustable weighting system 3366 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated in a number of different patterns on the outer surface 3374 of the club head 3310.
  • the different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3382 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3330 because the weight(s) 3382 are not limited to specific weight housing structures.
  • the number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players.
  • the cable 3369 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3369 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3310.
  • the material and pattern of the cable 3369 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3310 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3366 of golf club head 3310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3366 of golf club head 3310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 33 lOhaving the adjustable weighting system 3366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIG. 82 illustrates a club head 3410 having a club head body 3414.
  • the club head 3410 includes an adjustable weighting system 3466 comprising a cable 3469 and a tensioner 3467 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 3410 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3466 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 3410 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 3466. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 3466 allows shifts in the club head 3410 CG to occur in a heel end 3422 to toe end 3418 direction keeping the overall club head 3410 CG in a low and back location.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 3466 allows shifts in the club head 3410 CG to occur about a y-axis (front to rear) to adjust the ball spin.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3466 is positioned on a sole 3430 of the club head 3410. As illustrated in FIG. 82, the sole 3430 comprises a channel 3413 and a plurality of visual details 3415.
  • the channel 3413 is shallow and lightweight compared to other channels having tracks and deep weight housings.
  • the channel 3413 extends from a generally central location on the sole 3430 of the club head 3410, toward a toe end 3418, along a trailing edge 3472 toward a heel end 3422, and back toward the general central location on the sole 3430.
  • the channel 3413 comprises channel wall 3483, and a channel floor 3481.
  • the channel walls 3483 are, at least a portion thereof, perpendicular (or in some embodiments inclined/declined at a different angle) to the channel floor 3481.
  • the channel walls 3483 and the channel floor 3481 are one continuous wall wherein the cross-section of the channel 3413 is a partial circle or partial ellipse.
  • the channel 3413 is configured to receive weights 3482, and the cable 3469.
  • the visual details 3415 of the club head 3410 can be aesthetic lines flush with the surface of the sole. In other embodiments, the visual details 3415 can be raised lines extending from the outer surface 3474 of the sole 3430. In other embodiments still, the visual details 3415 can be indentations or grooves into the outer surface 3474 of the sole 3430. In the embodiments wherein the visual details 3415 are grooves, the visual details 3415 can be configured to receive the weights 3482 and the cable 3469.
  • the club head 3410 comprises one weight 3482.
  • the club head 3410 comprises any number of weights 3482 such as one weight 3482, two weights 3482, three weights 3482, four weights 3482, five weights 3482, six weights 3482, seven weights 3482, or eight weights 3482.
  • the weights 3482 can be similar to the weights 3282, and 3382 as described above.
  • the weights 3482 comprises a generally elongated structures having a top surface, a bottom surface, a first end, a second end, and sidewalls. In some embodiments, the weight 3482 further comprising a general square cross-section.
  • the weight 3482 can have other cross-sectional shapes such as a trapezoid, or any four sided polygonal shape, any number sided polygonal shape, or a circle.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the weight 3482 is complementary to the cross-sectional shape of the channel 3413, wherein the bottom surface, and sidewalls of the weight 3482 abut against the channel walls 3483 and the channel floor 3481.
  • the weights 3482 further comprises a groove (not pictured).
  • the groove is positioned on the top surface of the weights 3482, extending in a direction from the first end to the second end of the weights 3482.
  • the groove of the weights 3482 is configured to receive the cable 3469.
  • the weights 3482 can comprise an aperture (not pictured) extending through the center from the first end to the second end of the weights 3482.
  • the aperture of the weights 3482 is configured to receive the cable 3469.
  • the weights 3482 can further comprise a friction member (not pictured).
  • the friction member is positioned on the bottom surface of the weights 3482.
  • the friction member can be positioned on the sidewalls of the weights 3482.
  • the friction member can be positioned on a combination of the bottom surface, and the sidewalls of the weights 3482.
  • the friction member allows for dampening of sound and vibration during impact with a ball. The friction member helps secure and further prevents the weights 3482 from shifting within the channel 3413 when the weights 3482 are locked in place by cable tension.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3466 comprises the tensioner 3467 and the cable 3469. As illustrated in FIG. 82, the tensioner 3467 is positioned in a generally central location on the sole 3430, disposed between the channels 3413 extending toward the generally central location on the sole 3430 of the club head 3410. Although in other embodiments, the tensioner 3467 can be positioned at other locations along the club head 3410, as long as the tensioner 3467 is disposed between the junction of the channel 3413.
  • the tensioner 3467 can be attached to the recessed to the club head 3410 by way of fastener or by an adhesive. When the tensioner 3467 is attached to the club head 3410, the height of the tensioner 3467 does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 3410 when at address. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3467 can be flush with the outer surface 3474 of the sole 3430.
  • the cable 3469 of the adjustable weighting system 3410 is similar to the cables 3269, and 3369 as described above.
  • the cable 3469 is configured to be attached to the tensioner 3467 and within the channel 3413. In other embodiments, the cable 3469 can extend and retract by other means other than the tensioner 3467.
  • the cable 3469 can be received within the channel 3413 or any of the visual details 3415.
  • the cable 3469 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope.
  • the cable 3469 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
  • the tensioner 3467 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367 as described above, wherein the tensioner 3467 is a winch and ratchet mechanism.
  • the tensioner 3467 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above.
  • the tensioner 367 can be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3469.
  • the cable 3469 is coupled to the groove of the weights 3482 (or the cable 3569 passes through an aperture weights 3482), and such that the cable 3469 presses the weight or weights 3482 against the channel floor 3481 and channel walls 3483 of the channels 3413.
  • the sidewalls of the weights 3482 abut against the channel walls 3483 and channel floor 3481.
  • the friction members in combination with the sidewalls of the weights 3482 can abut the channel walls 3483 and channel floor 3481.
  • the tensioner 3467 can be pushed downward, or pulled upward to release the tension and loosen the cable 3469. Once the cable 3469 is loosened, the weights 3482 can be taken out and repositioned anywhere along the channel 3413. In embodiments with weights 3482 having apertures instead of grooves, the weights can be slid within the channel 3413 without being removed from the cable 3469. Once the weights 3482 are repositioned, the tensioner 3467 can tighten up the cable 3469 to secure the weights 3482 within the channel 3413 by tension and friction. The ability to reposition the weights 3482 to different positioned along the channel 3413 allows for an end user to adjust the CG of the club head 3410.
  • the weight 3482 can be repositioned from near the toe end 3418 to near the heel end 3422, wherein ball trajectory can be corrected for a player who tends to hook the ball.
  • the cable 3469 can be tightened/loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 3467.
  • the tensioner 3467 is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3467 is pressed downward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism to release tension from the cables 3469.
  • the tensioner 3467 is released (e.g., when the cable 3469 is extended), the weight 3482 may then be repositioned into a different area along the channels 3413, so as to change a center of gravity of the club head 3410.
  • the tensioner 3467 is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3467 is pulled upward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism to release tension from the cables 3469.
  • a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3467 and/or to release tension in the cable 3467.
  • the club head 3410 having the adjustable weighting system 3466 comprises a tensioner 3467 (or other adjustment means) and the cable 3469 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3466 allows for the club head 3410 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end), and about the y-axis (strikeface-to-rear) without having to sacrifice a relatively high MOI similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory, while shifting the CG about the y-axis allows players to control the spin imparted on a ball.
  • the club 3410 head having the tensioner 3467 and the cable 3469 adjustable weight system further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps).
  • the weight(s) 3482 coupled to the channel 3413 are secured by the tension of the cable 3469, which create a friction between a surface of the weight(s) 3482 and the channel walls 3483 and the channel floor 3481 of the channel 3413.
  • the tension and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 3410 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 3482. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure.
  • the mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 3482 to increase strength and/or mass in that location.
  • the tension and friction created by the cable 3469 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3482 and club head 3410 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener.
  • the lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
  • the cable 3469 of the adjustable weighting system 3466 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channel(s) 3413 in a number of different patterns on the club head 3410.
  • the different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3482 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3430 because the weight(s) 3430 are not limited to specific weight housing structures.
  • the number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players.
  • the cable 3469 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3469 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3410.
  • the material and pattern of the cable 3469 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3410 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3466 of golf club head 3410 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3466 of golf club head 3410 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the lightweight adjustable weighting system 3466, and lack of a complex internal/external weight housing structure.
  • the club head 3410 having the adjustable weighting system 3466 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIG. 83 illustrates a club head 3510 having a club head body 3514.
  • the club head 3510 includes an adjustable weighting system 3566 comprising a cable 3569 and a tensioner 3567 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 3510 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3566 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 3510 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 3566.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 3566 allows shifts in the club head 3510 CG to occur in a heel end 3522 to toe end 3518 direction keeping the overall club head 3510 CG in a low and back location.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 3566 allows shifts in the club head 3510 CG to occur about a y-axis (front to rear) to adjust the ball spin.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3566 is positioned within a shallow recessed portion 3580 of a sole 3530 of the club head 3510.
  • the recessed portion 3580 is shallow and does not comprise complex geometries compared to other club heads with deep, complex and heavy weight ports.
  • the club head 3510 is void of the recessed portion 3580 and the adjustable weighting system
  • the recessed portion 3580 is positioned on an outer surface 3574 of the sole 3530. As illustrated in FIG 83, the recessed portion 3580 is positioned on a portion of a sole 3530 of the club head 3510. The recessed portion 3580 extends from a heel end 3522, along a trailing edge 3572, a toe end 3518, and a generally central positioned on the sole 3530, forming a partial imperfect circle shape. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 3580 can form any shape on the sole 3530 of the club head 3510.
  • the recessed portion 3580 comprises a recessed surface 3581.
  • the recessed portion 3580 is separated from a remaining outer surface 3574 of the sole 3530 by a wall 3583.
  • the wall 3583, or at least a portion thereof, is perpendicular (or in some embodiments inclined/declined at a different angle) to the recessed surface 3581
  • the adjustable weighting system 3566 comprises the tensioner 3567, the cable 3569, and a plurality of guide elements 3575.
  • the tensioner 3567, the cable 3569, and a plurality of guide elements 3575.
  • the tensioner 3567 is positioned generally centrally on the sole 3530 (or centrally on the sole 3530 within the recessed portion 3580) of the club head 3510, although in other embodiments the tensioner 3567 can be positioned at other locations along the club head 3510.
  • the tensioner 3567 can be positioned near the toe end 3518, near the heel end 3522, or adjacent to the trailing edge 3574.
  • the tensioner 3567 can be attached to the club head by way of adhesive if by fasteners. When the tensioner 3567 is attached to the club head 3510, the tensioner 3567 does not extend past the lowest part of the club head 3510 when at address, thereby not obstructing a player's swing. In some embodiments, the tensioner 3567 is flush with the outer surface 3574 of the sole 3530.
  • the plurality of guide elements 3575 of the adjustable weighting system 3566 are configured to receive and guide the cable 3569.
  • the guide elements 3575 are positioned adjacent a trailing edge 3572 along the toe end 3518, the rear 3523, and the heel end 3522 of the club head 3510. In embodiments with the recessed portion 3580, the guide elements 3575 are positioned adjacent the trailing edge 3572, extending from the wall 3583.
  • the club head 3510 comprises five guide elements 3573 : a first guide element 3573A near the toe end 3518, a second guide element 3573E near the heel end 3522, a third guide element 3573C in a general center between the first guide element 3573 A and the second guide element 3573E, a fourth guide element 3573B between the first guide element 3573 A and third guide element 3575C, and a fifth guide 3573D between the second guide element 3573E and the third guide element 3573C.
  • the club had 3510 can comprise different numbers of guide elements 3573, as well as different locations for the guide elements 3573.
  • the club head 3510 can comprise one guide element 3573, two guide elements 3573, three guide elements 3573, four guide elements 3573, five guide elements 3573, six guide elements 3573, guide elements 3573, seven guide elements 3573, or eight guide elements 3573.
  • the cable 3569 is engaged with the guide elements 3573, which re-route the cable or cables 3569 back toward the tensioner 3567, thus forming a crisscrossing network that provides a variety of different positions and numbers of different positions (e.g., one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight, etc.) for the weight or weights 3582.
  • the cable 3569 of the adjustable weighting system 3566 is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, and 3469 (e.g., the material used for the cables, the measurements of the cables, etc.).
  • the cable 3569 is configured to be received by the tensioner 3567 and the guide elements 3575.
  • the cable 3579 can be fed within the tensioner 3567, and is looped to different guide elements 3575 to create a web-like design on a portion of the sole 3530.
  • the cable 3569 can be attached to the tensioner 3567, and some of the guide members 3575, wherein the remaining guide elements 3575 do not receive the cable 3569.
  • the cable 3569 is received by the first and third guide elements 3575 A and 3573B near the toe end 3518, while the second and fourth guide elements 3575D and 3575C near the heel end 3522 are void of the cable 3569.
  • the cable 3569 is received by every other guide element 3575 for a more spaced out web-like design.
  • the cable 3569 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope.
  • the cable 3569 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
  • the cable 3569 is further configured to be received by a groove 3571 of a weight 3582
  • the weight 3582 of the club head 3510 can be similar to the weights 3282, 3382, and 3482 as described above.
  • the weight 3582 comprise a top surface, and a bottom surface.
  • the top surface comprises the groove 3571.
  • the groove 3571 is configured to receive the cable 3569 of the adjustable weighting system 3566.
  • the groove 3571 has a C-shaped (or other shaped) contour, so as to facilitate retention of the cable 3569 along the top surface of the weight 3582.
  • the weight 3582 comprises a through aperture (not pictured) to receive the cable 3569, such that the weight 3582 may slide along the cable 3569.
  • the weights 3582 further comprise a cross-sectional shape generally curved to the contour of the recessed surface 3581 (or the outer surface 3574) of the sole 3530.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the weights 3582 can be a cube, a rectangular prism, a curved rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or any polygonal shape.
  • the club head 3510 can comprise any number of weights, such as one weight 3582, two weights 3582, three weights 3582, four weights 3582, five weights 3582, six weights 3582, seven weights 3582, or eight weights 3582.
  • the weights 3582 can further comprise a friction member positioned on the bottom surface of the weights 3582.
  • the friction member can be made of polymers such as low-density polyethylene (LDPE), high-density
  • HDPE polyethylene
  • PP polypropylene
  • PVC polyvinyl chloride
  • PS polystyrene
  • teflon Polytetrafluoroethylene
  • thermoplastic polyurethanes natural polyisoprene, synthetic polyisoprene, polybutadiene, chloroprene rubber, butyl rubber, styrene- butadiene nitrile rubber or any other polymer, elastomers, and friction/dampening material.
  • the friction member on the weight 4982 is adjacent the recessed surface 3581 (or outer surface 3574) of the sole 3530, which creates a frictional force to prevent the weight 3582 from shifting on the sole 3530.
  • the friction member can be attached to the weights 3582 by adhesion or any other means.
  • the friction member can further act as a dampener for sound and vibration. Dampening the sound and vibration can be more pleasing to an end user, as well as relieve stress during impact.
  • the intricate web-like design of the cable 3569 allows for the weights 3582 to be positioned onto the club head 3510 at multiple locations.
  • the weight 3582 can be positioned on the club head near the toe end 3518, near the toe end 3518 proximate the rear 3523, near the toe end 3518 proximate the center of the club head 3510, near the toe end 3518 proximate the strikface, near the heel end 3522, near the heel end 3522 proximate the rear 3523, near the heel end proximate the strikeface, or near the heel end 3522 proximate the center of the club head 3510.
  • Having multiple locations to place the weight 3582 can help the end user to fine tune the CG of the club head 3510 to help correct hook, slice, or ball spin.
  • the tensioner 3567 is similar to the tensioner 3267, 3367, and 3467, wherein the tensioner acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism.
  • the tensioner 3567 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above.
  • the tensioner 3567 can be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable or cables 3569.
  • the cable 3569 is coupled to the groove 3571 of the weight 3582. In other embodiments, the cable 3569 receive through the aperture of the weight 3582.
  • the tensioner 3567 When the tensioner 3567 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3569 is tightened, and the cable 3569 presses on the groove 3572 (or aperture) of the weight 3582 creating a force on the weight 3582 firmly against the recessed surface 3581 (or outer surface 3574).
  • the force created by the tension placed on the weight 3582 against the sole 3530 of the club head 3510 secures the weight 3582 onto the club head 3510.
  • the weight 3582 comprise the friction member
  • a frictional force is created between the abutting surfaces of the friction member of the weight 3582 and of sole 3530 of the club head 3510. The two forces created secures the weight 3582 onto the club head 3510 and prevents the weight 3582 from sliding or shifting on the sole 3530.
  • the cable 3569 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 3567.
  • the tensioner 3567 can be pressed downward (or pulled upward) to decrease the tension in the cable 3569 and loosen the cable 3569 on the weigh 3582.
  • the weight 3582 can be repositioned to a different location the club head 3510.
  • the weight 3582 can be slid along the cable 3569 to be repositioned to different locations on the club head 3510. Reposition the weight 3582 can affect the CG.
  • the weights 3582 can be positioned near the heel end 3522 to correct ball trajectory for a player who tends to hook the ball.
  • the weights 3582 can be positioned near the toe end 3518 and more back toward the trailing edge 3572 to correct ball trajectory for a player who tends to slice the ball and decreased ball spin.
  • the cable 3569 can be loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 3567.
  • the tensioner 3567 is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3567 is pressed downward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism, to release the tension of in the cable 3569.
  • the tensioner 3567 is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3567 is pulled upward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism, to release the tension of in the cable 3569.
  • a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3567 and/or to release tension in the cable 3569.
  • the club head 3510 having the adjustable weighting system 3566 comprises a tensioner 3567(or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 3569 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3566 allows for the club head 3510 to adjust the already low and back CG about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end), and about the y-axis (strikeface-to-rear) without having to sacrifice a relatively high MOI similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory, while shifting the CG about the y-axis allows players to control the spin imparted on a ball.
  • the club head 3510 having the tensioner 3567 and the cable 3569 adjustable weight system 3566 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps).
  • the weight(s) 3582 coupled to the club head body 3514 are secured by the tension of the cable 3569, which create a friction between the friction member of the weight(s) 5382 and the recessed surface 3581 (or outer surface 3574) of the sole 3530.
  • the tension and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 3510 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s).
  • the mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 3510 to increase strength and/or mass in that location.
  • the tension and friction created by the cable 3569 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3582 and club head 3510 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener.
  • the lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
  • the cable 3569 of the adjustable weighting system 3566 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated in a number of different patterns on the sole 3530 of the club head 3510.
  • the different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3582 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3530 because the weight(s) 3582 are not limited to specific weight housing structures.
  • the number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players.
  • the cable 3569 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3569 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3510.
  • the material and pattern of the cable 3569 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3510 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3566 of golf club head 3510 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3566 of golf club head 3510 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the lightweight adjustable weighting system 3566, and lack of a complex internal/external weight housing structures.
  • the club head 3510 having the adjustable weighting system 3566 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 84 and 85 illustrate a club head 3610 having a club head body 3614.
  • the club head 3610 includes an adjustable weighting system 3666 comprising a cable 3669 and a tensioner 3667 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 3610 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various parameters
  • the adjustable weighting system 3666 is a low profile system and
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 3666 ensures that shifts in the club head 3610 CG occur mainly in a heel end 3622 to toe end 6318 direction keeping the overall club head 6310 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3666 is positioned on a sole 3630 of the club head 3610.
  • the sole 3630 comprises an outer surface 3674 wherein the outer surface 3674 comprises a channel 3613.
  • the channel 3613 extends into the outer surface 3674, extending from a general central location of the sole 3630 toward a toe end 3618, along a trailing edge 3672 toward a heel end 3622, and back toward the general central location of the sole 3630.
  • the channel 3613 comprises walls 3683 that separates the channel 3613 from the outer surface 3674 of the sole 3630, and a bottom wall 3681 disposed between the walls 3683 of the channel 3613.
  • the channel 3613 further comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 3670 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the features 3670 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 3682 to the club head 3610. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the features 3670 are notches embedded within the bottom wall 3681 of the channel 3613 along the trailing edge 3672 to secure a weight 3682, wherein the walls 3683 of the channel 3613 partially encases the features 3670.
  • the channel 3613 can comprise any number of features such as one feature 3670, two features 3670, three features 3670, four features 3670, five features 3670, six features 3670, seven features 3670, or eight features 3670.
  • each of the features 3670 is spaced equidistant from one another. In other embodiments, each of features 3670 is spaced at any distance from one another.
  • the features 3670 can be two features 3670 proximal to one another at the toe end 3618, and one feature 3670 distal from the prior two features 3670, at the heel end 3622.
  • the features 3670 are defined generally by three sides formed in the bottom wall 3681 of the channel 3613, forming a generally trapezoidal-shaped area to receive and secure a weight 3682.
  • the features 3670 are notches that are defined by any number of sides (e.g., two sides, three sides, four sides, five sides, or six sides) to have other shapes (e.g., circular, triangular, square, pentagonal, hexagonal, etc.).
  • the features 3670 can comprise a partial spherical shape, a partial cylindrical shape, or any other partial circular shape.
  • the features 3670 are covered notches, as opposed for example to the open notches illustrated in FIG. 74.
  • the weights 3682 configured to be received by the features 3670 are similar to the weights 3282, 3382, 3482, and 3582 as described above.
  • the weights 3682 comprise a general shape such as a cylinder, a triangular prism, a cube, a rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or etc.
  • the weights 3682 each comprise a shape and size that is complementary to the features 3670, such that the weights 3682 fit within the features 3670 and surfaces of the weights 3682 abut tightly against the walls 3683 and bottom wall 3681 of the feature 3670.
  • the club head 3610 can comprise one weight 3682.
  • the club head 3610 can comprise any number of weights 3682 such as one weight 3682, two weights 3682, three weights 3682, four weights 3682, five weights 3682, six weights 3682, seven weights 3682, or eight weights 3682.
  • the weights 3682 further comprise a mass.
  • the mass of the weights 3682 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams.
  • the weights 3782 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
  • the weights 3682 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses.
  • the club head 3610 comprises three weights 3682 with the first weight 3682 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 3682 having a mass of 5 grams.
  • the club head 3610 comprises four weights 3682 with the first weight 3682 having a mass of 20 grams, the second weight 3682 having a mass of 15 grams, the third weight 3682 having a mass of 10 grams, and the fourth weight 3682 having a mass of 7 grams.
  • the weights 3682 comprise a groove 3671 on a surface of the weights 3682 exposed when positioned within the features 3670.
  • the groove 3671 is configured to receive the cable 3669 of the adjustable weighting system 3666.
  • the groove 3671 has a C-shaped (or other shaped) contour, so as to facilitate retention of the cable 3669 along the surface of the weight 3682.
  • the weight 3582 comprises a through aperture (not pictured) to receive the cable 3669, such that the weight 3682 may slide along the cable 3669.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3666 comprises the tensioner 3667, and the cable 3669. As illustrated in FIG. 84, the tensioner 3667 is positioned in a general central along the sole 3630 of the club head 3610 disposed between the channel 3613 extending from the central location toward the toe end 3618, and the channel 3613 extending from the heel end 3622 toward the central location on the sole 3630. Although, in other embodiments the tensioner 3667 can be positioned at other locations along the club head 3610, just as long as the tensioner 3667 is disposed between the junction of the channel 3613 extending from the toe end 3618 and the heel end 3622.
  • the tensioner 3667 can be attached to the club head 3610 by way of a fastener or by an adhesive. When the tensioner 3667 is attached to the club head 3610, the tensioner 3667 does not pass the lowest point of the club head 3610 to not obstruct a player's swing. In other
  • the tensioner 3667 can be flush with the outer surface 3674 of the sole 3630.
  • the cable 3669 of the adjustable weighing system 3666 is similar to the cable 3267, 3367, 3467, and 3567 as described above (e.g., measurements, materials, etc.).
  • the cable 3669 is configured to be couple to the tensioner 3667 and received within the channel 3613.
  • the cable 3669 is further received within the groove 3671 of the weights 3682.
  • the cable 3669 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope.
  • the cable 3669 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
  • the tensioner 3667 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, and 3567 wherein the tensioner acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism.
  • the tensioner 3667 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above.
  • the tensioner 3667 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3669.
  • the cable 3669 is coupled to the weights 3682 (e.g., positioned along an external groove 3671 or within the aperture in the weights 3682).
  • the tensioner 3667 When the tensioner 3667 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3669 is tightened, and the cable 3669 presses on the weights 3682 to abut against the features 3670 of the channel 3613.
  • the tension of the cable 3669 on the weights 3682 create a force on the weights 3682 onto the wall 4683, and bottom wall 3681 of the features 3670 to prevent the weights 3682 from popping out or shifting within the channel 3613.
  • the tensioner 3667 can be pressed downward (or pulled upward) to release the tension to loosen the cable 3669.
  • the weights 3682 can then be taken out of the features 3670 and repositioned to a different feature 3670 to adjust the CG of the club head 3610.
  • the weights 3682 can be repositioned from a feature 3670 near the heel to the feature 3670 near the toe end 3618 to correct a player who tends to slice the ball.
  • the weights 3682 comprise an aperture
  • the weights 3682 can be taken out of the features 3670 and can slide along the cable 3669 (without being removed from the cable 3669) to be
  • the tensioner 3667 is naturally in a locked stated, wherein the tensioner 3667 must be pressed-down to engage the rotation movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to loosen the cable 3669. In some embodiments, the tensioner 3667 is naturally in a locked stated, wherein the tensioner 3667 must be pulled upward to engage the rotation movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to loosen the cable 3669. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3667 to increase tension, and/or to release tension in the cable 3669. In other embodiments, the cable 4669 can be retracted/loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 3667.
  • the club head 3610 having the adjustable weighting system 3666 comprises a tensioner 3667 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 3669 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3666 allows for the club head 3610 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
  • the club head 3610 having the tensioner 3667 and the cable 3669 adjustable weight system 3666 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps).
  • the weight(s) 3682 coupled to the club head body 3614 are secured by the tension of the cable 3669, which create a force on the weight(s) 3682 onto the feature 3670.
  • the tension produced force eliminates the need for the club head 3610 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 3682. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure.
  • the mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 3610 to increase strength and/or mass in that location.
  • the tension produced force created by the cable further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3682 and club head 3610 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener.
  • the lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
  • the cable 3669 of the adjustable weighting system 3666 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channel 3613 in a number of different patterns on an outer surface 3674 of the club head.
  • the different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3682 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3630 because the weight(s) 3682 are not limited to specific weight housing structures.
  • the number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players.
  • the cable 3669 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3669 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3610.
  • the material and pattern of the cable 3610 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3666 of golf club head 3610 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3666 of golf club head 3610 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 3610 having the adjustable weighting system 3666 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above
  • FIGS. 86 and 87 illustrate a club head 3710 having a club head body 3714.
  • the club head 3710 includes an adjustable weighting system 3766 comprising a cable 3769 and a tensioner 3767 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 3710 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3766 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 3710 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 3766. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 3766 ensures that shifts in the club head 3710 CG occur mainly in a heel end 3722 to toe end 3718 direction keeping the overall club head 3710 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3766 is positioned on a sole 3730 of the club head 3710.
  • the sole 3730 comprises a recessed portion 3780 extending along the trailing edge 3772, from a heel end 3722, toward a rear 3723, and toward a toe end 3718, wherein the recessed portion 3780 forms an almost parallel perimeter along the trailing edge 3772.
  • the recessed portion 3780 can be placed anywhere on the sole 3730 and form any shape.
  • the recessed portion 3780 is separated from the rest of an outer surface 3774 of the sole 3730 by a wall 3783.
  • the wall 3783 is, at least a portion thereof, perpendicular (or in some embodiments inclined/declined at a different angle) to the recessed portion 3780.
  • the recessed portion 3780 comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 3770 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the features 3770 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 3782 to the club head 3710. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the features 3770 are indentations into the wall 3783 positioned farthest from the trailing edge 3772.
  • the recessed portion 3780 comprises four features 3770, a first feature 3770A near the toe end 3718, a second feature 3770D near the heel end 3722, a third feature 3770B between the first feature 3770 A and the second feature 3770D, and a fourth feature 3770C between the second feature 3770D and the third feature 3770B.
  • the recessed portion 3780 can comprise any numbers of features 3770.
  • the recessed portion 3780 can comprise any number of features 3770, such as one feature 3770, two features 3770, three features 3770, four features 3770, five features 3770, six features 3770, seven features 3770, or eight features 3770.
  • Each of the features 3770 are spaced generally equally apart from one another.
  • the features 3770 can be spaced any distance apart from one another.
  • the feature 3770 are defined generally as indentation with three sides formed into the wall 3783, forming a generally trapezoidal-shaped area.
  • the features 3770 can form any number of sides into the wall 3783 that have other profile shapes (e.g., circular, triangular, etc.).
  • the features 3770 can form a curved wall into the wall 3783, forming a partial circle shape, or partial ellipse shape.
  • the weights 3782 to be received by the features 3770 are similar to the weights 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, and 3682 as described above. As illustrated in FIG. 87, the weights 3782 each have a general cross-sectional shape and size (cylindrical, cubicle, rectangular, trapezoidal, etc.). In many embodiments, the general cross-sectional shape and size of the weights 382 are complementary to the profile shapes of the general features 3770, such that surfaces of the weights 3782 abut against the features 3770 of the recessed portion 3780.
  • the weights 3782 further comprise a mass.
  • the mass of the weights 3782 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams.
  • the weights 3782 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
  • the weights 3782 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses.
  • the club head 3710 comprises three weights 3782 with the first weight 3782 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 3782 having a mass of 5 grams.
  • the club head 3710 comprises four weights 3782 with the first weight 3782 having a mass of 20 grams, the second weight 3782 having a mass of 15 grams, the third weight 3782 having a mass of 10 grams, and the fourth weight 3782 having a mass of 7 grams.
  • the weights 3782 can further comprise a groove 3771 positioned on a surface of the weights 3782 configured to receive a cable 3769.
  • the groove 3771 is positioned on a surface of the weights 3782 opposite the surfaces of the weights 3782 abutting the features 3770.
  • the groove 3771 has a C-shaped (or other shaped) contour, so as to facilitate retention of the cable 3769 along the top surface of the weight 3782.
  • the weights 3782 comprise a through aperture (not pictured) configured to receive the cable 3769.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3766 comprises the tensioner 3767 and the cable 3769.
  • the tensioner 3767 is positioned in the recessed portion 3780 adjacent a heel or heel end 3722 of the club head 3710. Although in other embodiments, the tensioner 3767 can be positioned at other locations in the recessed portion 3780 along the club head 3710 such as the toe end 3718.
  • the tensioner 3767 can be attached to the club head 3710 by way of fastener or by an adhesive. When the tensioner 3767 is attached to the club head 3710, the tensioner 3767 does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 3710 when at address. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3767 can be flush with the outer surface 3774 of the sole 3730.
  • the cable 3769 of the adjustable weighting system 3766 is configures to be positioned within the recessed portion 3780.
  • the cable 3769 comprises a first end and a second end.
  • the first end of the cable 3769 is configured to be coupled to the tensioner 3767, while the second end of the cable 3769 is configure to be attached/fixed at an opposite end of the club head 3710 from the tensioner 3767.
  • the second end of the cable 3769 is attached/fixed at the toe end 3722 of the club head 3710.
  • the cable 3769 can be similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, and 3669 as described above.
  • the cable 3769 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope.
  • the cable 3769 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
  • the tensioner 3767 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, and 3667 as described above, wherein the tensioner 3767 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism.
  • the tensioner 3767 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above.
  • the tensioner 3767 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3769.
  • the cable 3769 is coupled to one or more of the weights 3782 (e.g., positioned along an external groove 3771 or within the aperture in the weights 3782).
  • the tensioner 3767 When the tensioner 3767 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3769 is tightened, and the cable 3769 presses on the weights 3782 creating a force against the features 3770 of the recessed portion 3780 to secure the weights 3782.
  • the weights 3782 When the weights 3782 abut against the features 3770, the weights 3782 are flush with the outer surface 3774 of the sole 3730. In other embodiments, when the weights 3782 abut against the features 3270, the weights 3782 can extend past the outer surface 3774 of the sole 3230, however, still do not extend past the lowest point of the club head 3710 when at address.
  • the weights 3782 when the weights 3782 abut against the features 3770, the weights 3782 do not extend to, or past the outer surface 3774 of the sole 3230.
  • the cable 3769 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 3767.
  • the tensioner 3767 can be pressed downward (or pulled upward) to loosen the tension on the cable 3769. As the tension in the cable 3769 decreases, the weights 3782 are no longer pressed against the features 3770 of the recessed portion 3780. The weights 3782 can then be removed from the features 3770 and be repositioned by an end user to different features 3770 within the recessed portion 3780. In embodiments where the weights 3782 comprise an aperture instead of the groove 3771, the weights 3782 can be slid along the cable 3769 to reposition the weights 3782. Repositioning the weights 3782 reconfigures the CG of the club head 3710.
  • the weight 3782 can be repositioned from the first feature 3770A to the second feature 3770D near the heel end 3722, wherein the CG shift toward the heel end 3722 helps correct ball trajectory for players who tend to hook the ball.
  • the cable 3769 can be loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 3767.
  • the tensioner 3767 is in a naturally locked position, wherein the tensioner 3767 can be pressed downward to engage rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to release tension of the cable 3769 on the weights 3782.
  • the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 3769 is
  • the weights 3782 may then be repositioned into a different features 3770 along the club head 3710 to change the center of gravity.
  • the tensioner 3767 is in a naturally locked configuration, wherein the tensioner 3767 can be pulled upward to engage rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release tension of the cable 3769 on the weights 3782.
  • a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3767 and/or to release tension in the cable 3769.
  • the club head 3710 having the adjustable weighting system 3766 comprises a tensioner 3767 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 3769 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3766 allows for the club head 3710 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
  • the club head 3710 having the tensioner 3767 and the cable 3769 adjustable weight system 3766 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps).
  • the weight(s) 3782 coupled to the club head body 3714 are secured by the tension of the cable 3769, which create a force on the weight(s) 3782 onto the feature(s) 3770 of the club head 3710.
  • the tension produced force eliminates the need for the club head 3710 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 3782. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure.
  • the mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head to increase strength and/or mass in that location.
  • the tension created force of the cable 3769 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3782 and the club head 3710 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener.
  • the lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
  • the cable 3769 of the adjustable weighting system 3766 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated in a number of different patterns on recessed portion 3780 of the club head 3710.
  • the different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3782 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3830 because the weight(s) 3782 are not limited to specific weight housing structures.
  • the number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players.
  • the cable 3769 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3710.
  • the material and pattern of the cable 3769 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3710 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3766of golf club head 3710 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3766 of golf club head 3710 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 3710 having the adjustable weighting system 3766 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 88 and 89 illustrate a club head 3810 having a club head body 3814.
  • the club head 3810 includes an adjustable weighting system 3866 comprising a cable 3869 and a tensioner 3867 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 3810 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various parameters
  • the adjustable weighting system 3866 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 3810 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 3866. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 3866 ensures that shifts in the club head 3810 CG occur mainly in a heel end 3822 to toe end 3818 direction keeping the overall club head 3810 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3866 is positioned within a recessed portion 3880 of the club head 3810. As illustrated in FIG. 88, the recessed portion 3880 is positioned on a sole 3830 of the club head 3810.
  • the recessed portion 3880 comprises a portion of a heel end 3822, and extends along a trailing edge 3872 toward a toe end 3818 to form a channel 3813.
  • the recessed portion 3880 and the channel 3813 further comprises a recessed surface 3881.
  • the recessed surface 3881 is separated by a remaining exterior surface 3874 of the sole 38030 by a wall 3883.
  • the wall 3883 is, at least along portions thereof, perpendicular (or in some embodiments
  • the recessed portion 3880 may include a recessed surface 3881 along a crown or top of the club head 3810.
  • the channel 3813 comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 3870 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • I % 3870 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 3882 to the club head 3810.
  • the features 3870 are protrusions extending from the recessed surface 3881 along the channel 3813 to secure weights 3882.
  • the features 3870 comprises sidewalls and forms a prismatic shape. As illustrated in FIG. 89, the features 3870 form a trapezoidal prism, while in other embodiments, the features can form any shape such as a pyramid or any prismatic shape (e.g., cylindrical, triangular, rectangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, etc.). Further illustrated in FIG.
  • the channel 3813 comprises three features 3870.
  • the channel 3813 can comprise any number of features 3870, such as one feature 3870, two features 3870, three features 3870, four features 3870, five features 3870, six features 3870, seven features 3870, or eight features 37870.
  • the features 3870 can be spaced generally evenly apart from one another. In other embodiments, the features 3870 are spaced at any distance apart from one another.
  • the channel 3813 comprises three features 3870, wherein a first feature 3870 is positioned at the toe end 3818, a second feature 3870 is positioned at the heel end 3822, and a third feature 3870 is positioned at a general center between the first feature 3870A and the second feature 3870C, are all equidistant form one another.
  • the channel 3813 comprises three features 3870 wherein the first and third features 3870 A and 3870B are positioned at the more near the toe end 3818, and the third feature 3870C is positioned in between the heel end 3822 and the general center of the trailing edge 3872.
  • the features 3870 are configured to receive weights 3882 similar to the weights 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, and 3782 (shape, material, etc.).
  • the different positions of the features 3870 in the channel 3813 allow for adjustment of the center of gravity based on the different positioning and distribution of the weights 3882.
  • the club head 3810 comprises one weight 3882.
  • the club head 3810 can comprise any number of weights 3882, such as one weight 3882, two weights 3882, three weights 3882, four weights 3882, five weights 3882, six weights 3882, seven weights 3882, or eight weights 3882.
  • the weights 3882 comprise a top surface, and a bottom surface opposite the top surface. When the weights 3882 are coupled to the channel 3813, the bottom surface of the weights 3882 is adjacent to the recessed surface 3881.
  • the bottom surface of the weights 3882 comprises a notch (not pictured) configured to receive the features 3870 of the channel 3813.
  • the notch of the weights 3882 having a cross-sectional shape. The cross-sectional shape of the notch is complementary to the shape of the features 3870.
  • the top surface comprises a groove 3871, wherein the groove 3871 is configured to receive the cable of the adjustable weight system 3866.
  • the groove 3871 has a C-shaped (or other shaped) contour, in order to facilitate retention of the cable 3869 along the top surface of the weights 3882.
  • the weights 3882 comprises a through aperture (not pictured) to receive the cable 3869, such that the weights 3882 may slide along the cable 3869
  • the weights 3882 further comprise a mass.
  • the mass of the weights 3882 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams.
  • the weights 3882 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
  • the weights 3882 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses.
  • the club head 3810 comprises three weights 3882 with the first weight 3882 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 3882 having a mass of 5 grams.
  • the club head 3810 comprises four weights 3882 with the first weight 3882 having a mass of 20 grams, the second weight 3882 having a mass of 15 grams, the third weight 3882 having a mass of 10 grams, and the fourth weight 3882 having a mass of 7 grams.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3866 comprises the tensioner 3867 and the cable 3869 configured to be attached to the tensioner 3869. As illustrated in FIG.
  • the tensioner 3867 is positioned on the recessed surface 3881 at the heel end 3822, although in other embodiments the tensioner 3867 is positioned at other locations along the recessed surface 3881 (e.g., at the toe end 3818, at the rear 3823, etc.).
  • the tensioner 3867 can be attached to the club head 3810 by way of fastener or by an adhesive. When the tensioner 3867 is attached to the recessed portion 3880 of the club head 3810, the tensioner 3867 does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 3810 when at address. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3867 can be flush with the outer surface 3874, or the recessed surface 3881 of the club head 3810.
  • the cable 3869 of the adjustable weighting system 3866 is configures to be received within the recessed portion.
  • the cable 3869 comprises a first end and a second end, wherein the first end is configured to be coupled to the tensioner 3867, and the second end is attached/fixed at a location on the club head 3810 opposite the location of the tensioner 3867.
  • the tensioner 3867 is positioned on the heel end 3822 of the club head, the second end of the cable 3869 is attached/fixed to the toe end 3818 of the club head 3810.
  • the cable 3869 can be similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3669, and 3769 as described above.
  • the cable 3869 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope.
  • the cable 3869 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
  • the tensioner 3867 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, and 3767 as described above, wherein the tensioner 3867 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism.
  • the tensioner 3867 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above.
  • the tensioner 3867 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3869.
  • the cable 3869 is coupled to the weights 3882 (e.g., positioned along an external groove 3871, or the aperture in the weight or weights 3882, so as to press against the weights 3882).
  • the tensioner 3867 When the tensioner 3867 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3869 is tightened (e.g., retracted), and the cable 3869 presses on the weights 3882 and abuts the notch of the weights 3882 against the features 3870, securing the weights within the channel 3813.
  • the weights 3882 When the weights 3882 are secured, the weights 3882 are flush with the outer surface 3874 of the sole 3830.
  • the weights 3883 can extend past the outer surface 3874 of the sole 3830, but not past the lowest point of the sole 3830. In other embodiments still, the weights 3882 do not extend all the way to the outer surface 3874 of the sole 3830.
  • the cable 3869 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 3867.
  • the tensioner 3867 can be pressed (or pulled) to loosen the tension on the cable 3869. As the tension in the cable 3869 decreases, the features 3870 are no longer abutting against the notches of the weights 3882. The weights 3882 can then be removed from the features 3870 and be repositioned by an end user to different features 3870 within the channel 3813. In embodiments where the weights 3882 comprise an aperture instead of the groove 3871, the weights 3882 can be slid along the cable 3869 to reposition the weights 3882. Repositioning the weights 3782 reconfigures the center of gravity of the club head 3710.
  • the CG shift toward the heel end 3822 helps correct ball trajectory for a player who tends to hook the ball.
  • the cable 3869 can be loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 3867.
  • the tensioner 3867 is in naturally locked position, wherein the tensioner 3867 can be pressed downward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to release the tension in the cable 3869.
  • the tensioner 3867 is released (e.g., when the cable 3869 is extended/loosened)
  • the weights 3882 may then be repositioned (placed or slid) onto a different area along the club head 3810 (e.g., onto a different protruding feature 3870).
  • the tensioner 3867 is in a naturally locked configuration, wherein the tensioner 3867 can be pulled upward to engage rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release the tension in the cable 3869.
  • a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3867 and/or to release tension in the cable 3869.
  • the club head 3810 having the adjustable weighting system 3866 comprises the tensioner 3867 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 3869 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3866 allows for the club head 3810 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows for players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
  • the club head 3810 having the tensioner 3867 and the cable 3869 adjustable weight system 3866 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps).
  • the weight(s) 3882 coupled to the features 3870 are secured by the tension of the cable 3869, which create a force on the notch of the a surface of the weight(s) and a surface of the club head.
  • the tension and fnctional force eliminates the need for the club head to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s). Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure.
  • the mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head to increase strength and/or mass in that location.
  • the tension and friction created by the cable further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) and club head do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener.
  • the lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
  • the cable 3869 of the adjustable weighting system 3866 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated in a number of different patterns on an outer surface 3874 of the club head 3810.
  • the different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3882 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3830 because the weight(s) 3882 are not limited to specific weight housing structures.
  • the number of different weight positions can help fine tune the center of gravity placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players.
  • the cable 3869 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3869 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3810.
  • the material and pattern of the cable 3869 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3810 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3866 of golf club head 3810 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3866 of golf club head 3810 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 3810 having the adjustable weighting system 3866 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 90-98 illustrate a club head 3910 having a club head body 3914.
  • the club head 3910 includes an adjustable weighting system 3966 comprising a weight 3982, a cable 3969, and a tensioner 3967 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 3910 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3966 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 3910 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 3966. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 3966 ensures that shifts in the club head 3910 CG occur mainly in a heel end 3922 to toe end 3918 direction keeping the overall club head 3910 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3966 is positioned on a sole 3930 of the club head 3910.
  • the sole 3930 of the club head 3910 comprises channels 3913.
  • the channels 3913 extend radially from a generally central location of the sole 3930 toward a trailing edge 3972.
  • the channels 3913 can extend radially from any location on the sole 3930 (e.g., central positioned proximate a toe end 3918, central positioned proximate a heel end 3922, etc.).
  • FIG. 90 the sole 3930 of the club head 3910 comprises channels 3913.
  • the channels 3913 extend radially from a generally central location of the sole 3930 toward a trailing edge 3972.
  • the channels 3913 can extend radially from any location on the sole 3930 (e.g., central positioned proximate a toe end 3918, central positioned proximate a heel end 3922, etc.).
  • the club head 3910 comprises four channels 3913, a first channel 3913A near the toe end 2918, a second channel 3913D proximate the heel end 3922, a third channel 3913B between the first channel 3913A and the second channel 3913D, and a fourth channel 3913C between the third channel 3913B and the second channel 3913D.
  • the club head 3910 can comprise any number of channels 3913, such as one channel 3913, two channels 3913, three channels 3913, four channels 3913, five channels 3913, six channels 3913, seven channels 3913, or eight channels 3913.
  • the channels 3913 comprise a recessed surface 3981, wherein the recessed surface 3981 is separated from the remaining outer surface 3974 of the sole 3930 by a wall 3984.
  • the recessed surface 3981 of the channels 3913 comprise a groove (not shown), wherein the groove can comprise a plurality of discrete attachment
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 3970 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the features 3970 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 3982 to the club head 3910. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the feature 3970 is a protrusion (e.g., a peg, a lip, a ledge, or any other protrusion configured to receive a hook-like formations on the weight 3982 of the adjustable weighting system 2966).
  • the feature 3970 is positioned within the recessed surface 3981, adjacent the trailing edge 3972.
  • the feature 3970 extends within the groove toward the trailing edge 3972 (either parallel with the recessed surface 3981, or at an angle).
  • the feature 3970 extends within the groove toward the trailing edge 3972 and then bends downward toward the sole 3930 to create a hook-like protrusion as illustrated in FIG. 93.
  • the feature 3970 extends within the groove toward the trailing edge 3972 and then bends upward away from the club head 3910 to create a hook-like protrusion as illustrated in FIG. 96. In embodiments wherein the feature 3970 extends toward the trailing edge 3972 and then bends upward away from the club head 3910, the feature 3970 does not extend past the lowest point of the golf club head 3910 when the club head 3910 is at address.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3966 comprises the tensioner the 3967, the cable 3969, and the weight 3982. As illustrated in FIGS. 90 and 91, the tensioner 3967 of the adjustable weighting system 3966 is positioned generally in a central location on the sole 3930 of the club head 3910, disposed between the radially extending channels 3913. Although in other embodiments, the tensioner 3967 can be positioned at other locations along the club head 3910, as long as the tensioner 3967 is disposed between the radially extending channels 3913.
  • the tensioner 3967 can be attached to the club head 3910 by way of fastener or by an adhesive.
  • the tensioner 3967 When the tensioner 3967 is attached to the club head 3310, the tensioner 3967 does not extend past the lowest part of the club head 3910 when at address, thereby not obstructing a player's swing.
  • the tensioner 3967 is configured to be coupled to the channel 3969 of the adjustable weighting system 3966.
  • the cable 3969 of the adjustable weighting system 3966 is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3769, and 3869 as described above.
  • the cable 3969 comprises a first end and a second end.
  • the first end of the cable 3969 is configured to attach to the tensioner 3967.
  • the second end of the cable 3969 is configured to be coupled to the weight 3982, such that the weight 3982 is configured to couple to the feature 3970.
  • the second end of the cable 3969 is coupled to the weights such that the second end of the cable 3969 creates a loop 3971 configured to couple to the feature 3970.
  • the weight 3982, or a clip attached to the second end and the cable can secure the loop 3971 to prevent unraveling.
  • the cable 3969 are positioned within any of the channels 3913.
  • the cable 3969 can be positioned in channel 3913B as illustrated in FIG. 90.
  • the cable 3969 can be positioned in channel 3913D closest to the heel end 3922. The different positioning of the cable 3969 allows for the weight 3982 coupled to the cable 3969 to adjust the weight distribution of the club head 3910.
  • the cable 3969 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope.
  • the cable 3969 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
  • the weight 3982 is an elongated body having a receiving region 3983.
  • the receiving region is a hook-like lip extending downward from the elongated body of the weight 3982 toward the sole 3930 of the club head 3910.
  • the receiving region 3983 can be a solid lip configured to hook over the feature 3970 and press against the feature 3970 to secure the weight 3982 from detaching from the feature 3970.
  • the receiving region 3983 can comprise an aperture 3985. The aperture 3985 is configured to receive the feature 3970 and the remaining portion of the receiving region presses up against the groove of the channel 3913 to secure the weight 3982 from detaching from the feature 3970.
  • the receiving region 3983 of the weight 3982 can curve into a J-shape to encase the feature 3970, securing the weight 3982 from detaching.
  • the weight 3982 is void of a receiving region 3983 and is not configured to receive the feature 3970.
  • the weight 3982 is an elongated body configured to receive and secure the cable 3969 as the cable 3969 forms the loop 3971. In embodiments wherein the cable 3969 forms the loop 3971, the cable can be couple to more than one weight 3982 (e.g., one weight 3982, two weights 3982, three weights 3982, four weights 3982, or five weights 3982).
  • the weight 3982 further comprise a mass.
  • the mass of the weight 3982 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams.
  • the weights 3982 can be 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
  • the weights 3982 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses.
  • the cable 3969 is coupled to three weights 3982 with the first weight 3982 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 3982 having a mass of 5 grams.
  • the couple is coupled to two weights 3982 with the first weight 3982 having a mass of 10 grams, and the second weight 3982 having a mass of 7 grams.
  • the weight 3982 when the weight 3982 is coupled to the feature 3970 (or the loop 3971 of the cable 3969 is coupled to the feature 3970), the weight 3982 is flush with the outer surface 3974 of the sole 3930. In other embodiments, the weight 3982 extend past the outer surface 3974 of the sole 3930, but does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 3910 at address to avoid obstructing a player's swing. In other embodiments still, the weight 3982 does not extend to the outer surface 3974 of the sole 3930 of the club head 3910.
  • the tensioner 3967 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, 3767, and 3867 as described above, wherein the tensioner 3967 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism.
  • the tensioner 3967 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above.
  • the tensioner 3967 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3969.
  • the cable 3969 is coupled to one or more of the weights 3982 (e.g., the weights 3982 being permanently or removably fixed at the second end of the cable 3969).
  • the tensioner 3967 When receiving region 3983 of the weight 3982 is coupled to one of the features 3970, the tensioner 3967 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3969 is tightened (e.g., retracted), and the weight are thus pulled firmly against the feature 3970 grooves of the channels 3913.
  • the pull on the weight 3982 creates a force against the feature 3970 (or groove of the channel 3969), which prevents the weight 3982 from popping off the feature 3970.
  • the cable 3969 itself forms the loop 3971, which is configured to receive the feature 3970.
  • the pull on the loop 3971 creates a force against the features 3970 to secure the coupling of the loop 3971 and the feature 3970.
  • Various other types of hooks, loops, and/or other structure may be used to couple the weight 3982 or loop 3971 to the feature 3970.
  • the cable 3969 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 3967.
  • the tensioner 3967 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 3967 can be pressed to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to loosen tension in the cable 3969.
  • the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 3969 is extended)
  • the weight 3982 may then be repositioned onto a different area along the club head 3910 (e.g., may be secured to a different feature 3970).
  • the cable 3969 may be moved from one channel 3913 to a different channel 3913.
  • the tensioner 3967 is naturally in a locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 3967 can be pulled upward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release the tension of the cable 3969.
  • a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3967 and/or to release tension in the cable 3969.
  • the club head 3910 having the adjustable weighting system 1966 comprises the tensioner 3967 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 3969 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3966 allows for the club head 3910 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end), and about the y-axis (strikeface-to-rear) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows for players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory, while shifting the CG about the y-axis allows for players to control the spin imparted on a ball.
  • MOI moment of inertia
  • the club head 3910 having the tensioner 3967 and the cable 3969 adjustable weight system 3966 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps).
  • the weight(s) 3982 coupled to the club head body 3914 are secured by the tension of the cable, which create a abutment force on the weight(s) 3982 onto the feature 3970.
  • the abutment force eliminates the need for the club head 3910 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 3982. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure.
  • the mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 3982 to increase strength and/or mass in that location.
  • the abutment force created by the cable 3969 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3982 and club head 3910 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener.
  • the lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
  • the cable 3969 of the adjustable weighting system 3966 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channels 3913 in a number of different patterns on an outer surface 3974 of the club head 3910.
  • the different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3982 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3930 because the weight(s) 3982 are not limited to specific weight housing structures.
  • the number of different weight positions can help fine tune the center of gravity placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players.
  • the cable 3969 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3969 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3910.
  • the material and pattern of the cable 3969 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3910 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3966 of golf club head 3910 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 3966 of golf club head 3910 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 3910 having the adjustable weighting system 3966 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 99 and 100 illustrate a club head 4010 having a club head body 4014.
  • the club head 4010 includes an adjustable weighting system 4066 comprises a weight 4082, a cable 4069, and a tensioner 4067 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 4010 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4066 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 4010 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 4066.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 4066 ensures that shifts in the club head 4010 CG occur in a heel end 4022 to toe end 4018 direction keeping the overall club head 4010 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4066 can further shift the CG about the y-axis (front and rear) to adjust ball spin.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4066 is positioned on a sole 4030 of the club head 4010.
  • the sole 4030 of the club head 4010 comprises channels 4013.
  • the channels 4013 extend from a generally central position adjacent a trailing edge 4072, toward a center, toward a toe end 4018, and/or toward a heel end 4022 of the sole 4030. In other embodiments, the channels 4013 can extend form any position on the sole 4030 of the club head 4010.
  • the sole 4030 comprises three channels 4013 : a first channel 4013 A running along he trailing edge 4072, toward the toe end 4018, a second channel 4013C running along the trailing edge 4072, toward the heel end 4022, and a third channel 4013B between the first channel 4013 A and the second channel 4013C, extending toward a general center of the sole 4030.
  • a first channel 4013 A running along he trailing edge 4072, toward the toe end 4018
  • a second channel 4013C running along the trailing edge 4072, toward the heel end 4022
  • a third channel 4013B between the first channel 4013 A and the second channel 4013C
  • the sole 4030 can comprise any number of channels 4013, such as one channel 4013, two channels 4013, three channels 4013, four channels 4013, five channels 4013, and five channels 4013.
  • the channels 4013 comprise a recessed surface 4081, wherein the recessed surface 4081 is separated from the remaining outer surface 4074 of the sole by a wall 4083.
  • the channels 4013 extend from the generally central positioned adjacent the trailing edge 4072 and extends into a recessed portion 4080 forming a circular recess.
  • the recessed portion 4080 can form any polygonal recess shape (e.g, triangular, square, trapezoidal, rectangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, etc.).
  • the recessed portion 4080 comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 4070 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the features 4070 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 4082 to the club head 4010. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the feature 4070 is a protrusion extending from a general center of the recessed portion. In some embodiments, the feature 4070 is flush with an outer surface 4074 of the sole 4030. In other embodiments, the feature 4070 does not extend past the outer surface 4074 of the sole 4030.
  • the recessed portion 4080 and feature 4070 are configured to receive a weight 4082 of the adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4066 comprises the tensioner 4067, the cable 4069, and the weight 4082. As illustrated in FIG. 4067, the tensioner is positioned on the generally central location on the sole 4030, adjacent the trailing edge 4072, and disposed between the intersection of the channels 4013. Although, in other embodiments, the tensioner 4067 can be positioned at other locations on the sole 4030, just as long as the tensioner 4067 is disposed between the intersection of the channels 4013.
  • the tensioner 4067 can be attached to the club head 4010 by way of fastener or by an adhesive. When the tensioner 4067 is attached to the sole 4010 of the club head 4010, the tensioner does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 4010 when at address.
  • the cable 4069 of the adjustable weighting system 4066 is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3769, 3869, and 3969 as described above.
  • the cable 4069 comprises a first end and a second end.
  • the first end of the cable 4069 is configured to attach to the tensioner 4067, while the second end of the cable 4069 is configured to attach to the weight 4082.
  • the cable 4069 is positioned within any of the channels 4010 to effect the weight distribution and CG of the club head 410.
  • the cable 4069 can be positioned in the third channel 4013B, wherein the third channel 4013B is located in the general center can give a player a neutral ball trajectory for player who typically is a straight shooter.
  • the cable 4069 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope.
  • the cable 4069 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
  • the weight 4082 is a general circular shape. In other embodiments, the weight 4082 can have any polygonal shape such as a triangular, square, rectangular, pentagonal, hexagonal or etc. In many embodiments, the weights 4082 are shaped similar to the polygonal shape of the recessed portion 4080 but slightly smaller, wherein when the weight 4082 is received within the recessed portion 4080, there is a gap around the perimeter of the weight 4082 which allows an end user room to retrieve the weight 4082.
  • the weight 4082 comprises an aperture (not pictured) positioned on a bottom surface of the weight 4082.
  • the aperture of the weight 4082 is configure to receive the feature 4070 of the recessed portion 4080 which is complementary to the aperture of the weight 4082.
  • the weight 4082 is flush with the outer surface 4072 of the sole 4030. In other embodiments, the weight 4082 is not flush with the outer surface 4072 of the sole 4030, wherein the weight 4082 can extend past, or does not extend to the outer surface 4072 of the sole 4030.
  • the weight 4082 further comprise a mass.
  • the mass of the weight 4082 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams.
  • the weights 4082 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
  • the tensioner 4067 is similar to the tensioner 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, 3767, 3867, and 3967 as described above, wherein the tensioner 4067 acts as a winch and
  • the tensioner 4067 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above.
  • the tensioner 4067 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 4069.
  • the cable 4069 are coupled to the weight 4082 (e.g., the weight 4082 being permanently or removably fixed at a distal end of the cable or cables 4069), and are disposed within channels 4013 that also form part of the recessed portion 4080.
  • the aperture of the weight 4082 receives the feature 4070 within the recessed portion 4080, which prevents the weight 402 from shifting.
  • the tensioner 4067 When the tensioner 4067 is rotated clockwise, the cable 4069 is tightened (e.g., retracted), and the weight is tightly latched onto the feature 4070 and is secured.
  • the cable 4069 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 4067.
  • the tensioner 4067 can be pressed (or pulled) to loosen the tension on the cable 4069. As the tension in the cable 4069 decreases, the weight 4082 does not create a force onto the feature 4070 to secure the weight 4082. The weight 4082 can then be removed from the recessed portion 4080 and be repositioned by an end user onto different features 4070 of a different recessed portion 4080. In other embodiments, the cable 4069 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 4067.
  • the tensioner 4067 is in a naturally locked positioned and can be pressed downward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to release tension in the cable or cables.
  • the tensioner 4067 is naturally in a locked portion, wherein the tensioner 4067 can be pulled upward away from the club head 4010 to engage the rotational movement to release the tension in the cable 4069.
  • the channels 4013 and/or the features 4070 include an undercut to facilitate retention of the weights 4082.
  • a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 4067 and/or to release tension in the cable 4069.
  • the cable 4069 can be loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 4067.
  • the club head 4010 having the adjustable weighting system 4066 comprises the tensioner 4067 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 4069 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4066 allows for the club head 4010 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory, and shifting the CG about the y-axis allows players to adjust the ball spin.
  • MOI moment of inertia
  • the club head 4010 having the tensioner 4067 and the cable 4069 adjustable weight system 4066 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps).
  • the weight 4082 coupled to the club head body 4010 are secured by the tension of the cable 4069, which create a friction between a surface of the weight 4082 and a surface of the recessed portion 4080 and the feature 4070.
  • the tension and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 4010 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight 4082. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure.
  • the mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 4010 to increase strength and/or mass in that location.
  • the tension and friction created by the cable 4069 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight 4082 and club head 4010 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener.
  • the lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
  • the cable 4069 of the adjustable weighting system 4066 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channels 4013 in a number of different patterns on an outer surface 4074 of the club head 4010.
  • the different patterns allows for the weight 4082 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 4030 because the weight 4082 are not limited to specific weight housing structures.
  • the number of different weight 4082 positions can help fine tune the center of gravity placement to adjust the ball spin and traj ectory for individual players.
  • the cable 4069 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 4069 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 4010.
  • the material and pattern of the cable 4069 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 4010 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4066 of golf club head 4010 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4066 of golf club head 4010 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the lightweight adjustable weighting system 4166, and the lack of a complex internal/external weight housing structure.
  • the club head 4010 having the adjustable weighting system 4066 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIG. 101 illustrates a club head 4110 having a club head body 4114.
  • the club head 4110 includes an adjustable weighting system 4166 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 4110 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4166 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 4110 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 4166.
  • the low profile adjustable weighting system 4166 ensures that shifts in the club head 4110 CG occur mainly in a heel end 4122 to toe end 41 18 direction keeping the overall club head 4110 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting systems allows for CG shifting about the y-axis (front to rear) to adjust ball spin.
  • the adjustable weighting system is positioned on a sole 4130 of the club head 4110. As illustrated in FIG. 101, the sole 4130 comprises channels 4113.
  • the channels 4113 extend from a generally central location adjacent a trailing edge 4172, extending toward a center, toward a toe end 4118, toward a heel end 4122 of the sole 4130, or a combination thereof.
  • the channels 4113 can extend form any position on the sole 4130 of the club head 4110.
  • the sole 4130 comprises three channels 4113 : a first channel 4115 running along he trailing edge 4172, toward the toe end 4118, a second channel 4116 running along the trailing edge 4172, toward the heel end 4122, and a third channel 4117 between the first channel 4113A and the second channel 4113C, extending toward a general center of the sole 4130.
  • the sole 4130 can comprise any number of channels 4113, such as one channel 4113, two channels 4113, three channels 4113, four channels 4113, five channels 4113, five channels 4113, six channels 4113, seven channels 4113, or eight channels 4113.
  • the channels 4113 comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 4170 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means.
  • the features 4170 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 4182 to the club head 4110. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
  • the features 4170 are notches or recessed portions positioned along the channels 4113 of the club head body 4110 configured to receive a weight 4182.
  • the features 4170 are generally triangular in the illustrated embodiment, but in other embodiments may have different shapes and/or sizes such as circular, square, rectangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, octagonal, or any other polygonal shape. Further illustrated in FIG.
  • each channel 4113 comprises two features 4170: wherein a first feature 4170 A is positioned rearward toward the trailing edge 4172 on the first channel 41 15 near the toe end 4118, a second feature 4170C is positioned rearward toward the trailing edge 4172 on the second channel 4116 near the heel end 4122, a third feature 4170B positioned rearward toward the trailing edge 4172 between the first feature 4170A and the second feature 4170C, a fourth feature 4170D is positioned more forward toward a strikeface on the first channel 4115 near the toe end 4118, a fifth feature 4170F is positioned more forward toward the strikeface on the second channel 4416 near the heel end 4122, and a sixth feature 4170E is positioned more forward toward the strikeface on on the third channel 4117.
  • the channels 4113 can comprise any number of features 4170 (e.g., one feature 4170, two features 4170, three features 4170, four features 4170, five features 4170, six features 4170, seven features 4170, or eight features 4170).
  • each channel 4113 can comprise the same number of features 4170, while in other embodiments, each channel 4113 can comprise different number of features 4170.
  • the first channel 4115 can comprise three features 4170, while the second channel 4116 comprises two features 4170.
  • the features 4170 can be space equidistant from one another. In other embodiments, the features 4170 can be spaced at any distance from one another. As illustrated in FIG. 101A, the features 4170 can overlap with one another.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4166 is comprises the tensioner 4167, the cable 4169, and the weight 4182. As illustrated in FIG. 101, the tensioner 4167 is positioned on a generally central location on the sole 4130 adjacent to the trailing edge 3172, and disposed between the intersection of the channels 4113. Although in other embodiments, the tensioner 4167 can be positioned at other locations on the sole 4130, and disposed between the intersection of the channels 4113.
  • the tensioner 4167 can be attached to the club head 4110 by way of fastener or by an adhesive. When the tensioner 4167 is attached to the sole 4110 of the club head 4110, the tensioner 4167 does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 4110 when at address. In other
  • the tensioner 4167 is flush with the outer surface 4174 of the sole 4130.
  • the cable 4169 of the adjustable weighting system 4166 is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3769, 3869, 3969, and 4069 as described above.
  • the cable 4169 comprises a first end and a second end.
  • the first end of the cable 4169 is configured to attach to the tensioner 4167, while the second end of the cable 4169 is configured to attach to the weight 4182.
  • the cable 4169 can be positioned within any of the channels 4113 (e.g., the first channel 4115, the second channel 4116, the third channel 4117), and paired with the different positioning of the features 4170 to effect the weight distribution and CG of the club head 4110.
  • the cable 4169 can be positioned in the first channel 4115, wherein the first channel 4115 is located at the toe end 4118 can correct a player who tends to slice a ball.
  • the cable 4169 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope.
  • the cable 4169 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
  • the channel 4169 is not coupled to the tensioner 4167 and can be loosen/retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 4167.
  • the weight 4182 is a general triangular shape.
  • the weight 4182 can have any polygonal shape such as a circular, square, rectangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, or any other geometric shape.
  • the weight 4182 is shaped similar to the polygonal shape of the feature 4170 but slightly smaller. Therefore, when the weight 4082 is received within the recessed portion 4080, there is a gap around the perimeter of the weight 4182, which allows an end user room to retrieve the weight 4182.
  • the weight 4182 is flush with the outer surface 4174 of the sole 4130. In other embodiments, the weight 4182 is not flush with the outer surface 4174 of the sole 4030, wherein the weight 4182 can extend past, or does not extend to the outer surface 4174 of the sole 4130.
  • the weight 4182 further comprise a mass.
  • the mass of the weight 4182 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams.
  • the weights 4182 can be 1 grams, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
  • the tensioner 4167 is similar to the tensioner 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, 3767, 3867, 3967, and 4067 as described above, wherein the tensioner 4167 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism.
  • the tensioner 4167 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above.
  • the tensioner 4167 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 4169.
  • the cable 4169 is coupled to the weight 4182 (e.g., the weight 4182 being permanently or removably fixed at distal end of the cable 4169).
  • the tensioner 4167 When the tensioner 4167 is rotated, the cable 4169 is tightened (e.g., retracted), and the cable 4169 pulls the weight or weights 4182, to create a force firmly against the feature 4170 of the club head body 4010, thereby securing the weight 4182.
  • the channels 4113 and/or the features 4170 themselves include an undercut to facilitate retention of the weights 4182.
  • the channel 4169 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 4167.
  • the tensioner 4167 can be pressed (or pulled) to loosen the tension on the cable 4169. As the tension in the cable 4069 decreases, the weight 4182 does not create a force onto the feature 4170 to secure the weight 4182. The weight 3882 can then be removed from the feature 4170 and be repositioned by an end user onto different features 4170 of the same channel 4113, or of different channels 4113. In other embodiments, the channel 4169 can be loosen by other means other than by the tensioner 4167.
  • the tensioner 4167 is in a naturally locked orientation and can be pressed downward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to release tension in the cable 4169.
  • the weights 4182 may then be repositioned onto different positions on the sole 4130 (e.g., may be secured to a different notched feature 4170).
  • the tensi oner 4167 is naturally in a locked portion, wherein the tensi oner 4167 can be pulled upward to engage the rotational movement to release the tension in the cable 4169.
  • a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 4167 and/or to release tension in the cable 4169.
  • the club head 4110 having the adjustable weighting system 4166 comprises the tensioner 4167 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 4169 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4166 allows for the club head 4110 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end), and about the y-axis (strikeface-to-rear) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows for players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory, while shifting the CG about the y-axis allows for players to control the spin imparted on a ball.
  • MOI moment of inertia
  • the club head 4110 having the tensioner 4167 and the cable 4169 adjustable weight system 4166 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps).
  • the weight(s) 4182 coupled to the feature(s) 4170 are secured by the tension of the cable, which create a friction between a surface of the weight(s) 4182 and a surface of the club head, as well as an abutment force within the feature(s) 4170.
  • the abutment and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 4110 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 4182.
  • the mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 411 to increase strength and/or mass in that location.
  • the abutment force and friction created by the cable 4169 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 4182 and club head 4110 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener.
  • the lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
  • the cable 4169 of the adjustable weighting system 4166 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channels 4113 in a number of different patterns on the outer surface 4174 of the club head 4110.
  • the different patterns allows for the weight(s) 4182 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 4130 because the weight(s) 4182 are not limited to specific weight housing structures.
  • the number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and traj ectory for individual players.
  • the cable 4169 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 4169 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 4110.
  • the material and pattern of the cable 4169 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4166 of golf club head 4110 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4166 of golf club head 4110 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the adjustable weighting system 4166 being lightweight and lack of complex internal/external weight housing structures.
  • the club head 4110 having the adjustable weighting system 4166 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 102 and 103 illustrate cross-sections of weights 4282 that are covered with a casing or casings 4283.
  • the casing 4283 may be made, for example, of rubber, silicon, an elastomer, or other material.
  • materials can be polymers such as low-density polyethylene (LDPE), high-density polyethylene (FIDPE), polypropylene (PP), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polystyrene (PS), teflon (Polytetrafluoroethylene), thermoplastic polyurethanes, natural polyisoprene, synthetic polyisoprene,
  • weights 4282 with casings 4282 may be used in conjunction with any of the club heads described above, and may dampen vibrations between the weight 4282 and the club head during impact with a golf ball, thereby improving sound and durability of the club head. Additionally, any of the other weights described herein may also include a casing 4283 similar to that illustrated in FIGS. 102 and 103.
  • FIG. 105 illustrates a club head 4310 having a club head body 4314.
  • the club head 4310 includes an adjustable weighting system 4366 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 4310 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4366 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 4310 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 4366. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 4366 ensures that shifts in the club head 4310 CG occur mainly in a heel end 4322 to toe end 4318 direction keeping the overall club head 4310 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4366 further comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations.
  • the plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 4370.
  • the features 4370 can be protruding bodies, apertures, recesses, ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches, tabs, cutout regions, ribs, grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets,
  • the adjustable weighting system 4366 can further comprise a shallow channel or shallow recessed portion 4313.
  • the channel 4313 is defined by three surfaces 4373, 4374, 4375, each of which can be configured to comprise at least one feature 4370.
  • Each feature 4370 defines a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 4382 to the club head 4310.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4366 includes a channel 4313 comprising a plurality of features 4370, wherein the features 4370 in the illustrated embodiment are apertures.
  • the channel 4313 extends from near the toe end 4318 in an arcuate manner to near the heel end 4322 following the contour of the trailing edge 4372 of the club head 4310.
  • the channel 4313 is defined by a first surface 4373, a second surface 4374 disposed opposite the first surface 4373, and a third surface 4375 that extends between the first surface 4373 and the second surface 4374.
  • the first surface 4373 extends parallel to the second surface 4374, and perpendicular to the third surface 4375.
  • the channel 4313 is further defined in part by additional end surfaces 4379 that directly intersect the first surface 4373, the second surface 4374, and the third surface 4375.
  • the additional end surfaces 4379 may provide added support and/or provide an abutment region or edge against which the weights 4383 may rest.
  • the weights 4382 can be flush with an outer surface 4390 of the club head 4310.
  • the flush orientation may improve air flow characteristics during a swing to improve the club head 4310 aerodynamics.
  • the channel 4313 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 4310, and/or along a direction that is normal to the third surface 4375.
  • the channel 4313 can comprise a constant depth from the toe end 4318 to the heel end 4322.
  • the channel 4313 can have a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth).
  • the channel depth 4313 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 4318 to the heel end 4322.
  • the weight 4382 when a weight 4382 is coupled to the club head 4310 in one region of the channel 4313, the weight 4382 may fit flush in the channel 4313 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 4373, 4374.
  • a portion of the weight 4382 may protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 4373, 4374.
  • the channel 4313 includes a region or regions at the rear or back end 4334 where a portion of the weight 4382 protrudes beyond the first surface 4373 and/or the second surface 4374 when coupled.
  • the channel 4313 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 4366 remains low profile.
  • the channel 4313 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches.
  • the channel 4313 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches.
  • the depth of the channel 4313 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches.
  • the channel 4313 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 4373 and the second surface 4374. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 4313 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 4313 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches.
  • the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
  • the channel 4313 can include one or more features 4370 defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 4382 to the club head 4310.
  • the features 4370 are apertures positioned on the third surface 4375 of the channel 4313.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4366 comprises three features 4370: a first feature 4370A near the toe end 4318, a second feature 4370C near the heel end 5722, and a third feature 4370B in a general center between the first feature 4370 A and the second feature 4370C.
  • the club head 4310 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten features 4370.
  • the features 4370 can be spaced evenly apart, or in other embodiments, the features 4370 can be spaced at any distance from one another. [00579]
  • the feature 4370 is configured to receive a fastener 4385.
  • the fastener 4385 can comprise threading to be secured into the feature 4370. In other embodiments, the fastener 4385 can be secured into the feature 4370 by press-fit, an adhesive, or by any other coupling means.
  • the weights 4382 comprises a first portion 4383, and a second portion 4384.
  • the weights 4382 can have a generally rectangular shape corresponding with the shape of the channel 4313. In other embodiments, the weights 4382 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the channel 4313.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4366 comprises one weight 4382. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 4366 can comprise more or less weights 4382 than the number of features 4370. For example, the adjustable weighting system 4366 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine to ten weights 4382.
  • the weights 4382 can comprise an insertion aperture 4384 that extends entirely through the weight 4382.
  • the insertion aperture 4384 is sized and shaped to receive a screw 4385.
  • the insertion aperture 4384 is threaded.
  • the screw aperture 4371 has a diameter equivalent to a diameter of the insertion aperture 4384, although in other embodiments at least a portion of the insertion aperture 4384 may have a diameter larger than the diameter of the screw aperture 4371.
  • each screw aperture 4371 is threaded, such that the screw 4385 may be rotated and threaded in place into each of the feature 4370, and such that the weight 4382 may be held tightly in place within the channel 4313 after the screw 4385 has been rotated and threaded in place.
  • the weights 4382 can further be secured at the features 4370 through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
  • each of the features 4370 can receive the fastener 4385, wherein the fastener 4385 extends through (or abuts the weight 4382, or abuts the blind aperture) the weight 4382.
  • one or more of the features 4370 receives a weight 4382, while the remaining features 4370 are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure.
  • one or more of the features 4370 receives more than one weight 4382.
  • a tool 4386 (e.g., common screwdriver, Allen wrench, specialized tool, etc.), may be provided to assist in the insertion and/or removal of the screw 4385.
  • the tool 4386 may be used to loosen the screw 4385, so that the weight 4382 may be moved along the channel 4313 to a different feature 4370. The same tool 4386 may then be used again to tighten the screw into the new feature 4370.
  • more than one weight 4382 is provided in the channel 4313, and/or the channel 4313 has a varying width to accommodate weights 4382 of different sizes and shapes.
  • the weight 4382 further includes a blind bore 4387 in communication with the insertion aperture
  • the blind bore 4387 is sized and shaped to receive at least the head of the screw
  • the screw 4385 is threaded into the feature 4370, such that the head of the screw 4385 extends out of the screw aperture 4371.
  • the weight 4382 is then placed over the head of the screw 4385, such that the head of the screw 4385 extends into the blind bore 4387.
  • the weight 4382 is then shifted laterally in the channel 4313 such that the head of the screw 4385 passes into the smaller insertion aperture 4384.
  • the tool 4386 is then used to tighten the screw 4385 down further into the feature 4370 to secure the weight 4382 in place onto the club head body 4314. To remove the weight 4382, the tool 4386 loosens the screw 4385.
  • the weight 4382 is then shifted back such that the head of the screw 4385 passes into the larger blind bore 4387.
  • the weight 4382 is then removed and moved over to a different location in the channel 4313.
  • I % 4371, and insertion apertures 4384 may utilize other structures to retain the weights 4382 within the channel 4313.
  • one or more clamps may be provided to releasably hold the weights 4382 within the channel 4313.
  • the weights 4382 themselves may be expanding weights, such that once the weights 4382 are placed within the channel 4313, the weights 4382 expand (e.g., naturally or with the aid of a tool) within the channel 4313, thereby creating a press fit within the channel 4313, securing the weights 4382 in place within the channel 4313.
  • each of the weights 4382 is illustrated having the same shape and size.
  • the weights 4382 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 4382 having varying masses.
  • the weights 4382 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass.
  • one weight 4382 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 4382 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic.
  • the weights 4382 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 4382 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 4382.
  • each of the weights 4382 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 4382 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 4382 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 4370. In some embodiments, the weights 4382 may vary between 0.1-50g.
  • one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 0-1 Og, one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 10-20g, one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 30-40g, and one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 4382 may vary between 0- lOg
  • a second weight 4382 may vary between 10-20g
  • a third weight 4382 may vary between 20-30
  • a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40g
  • a fifth weight 4382 may vary between 40-50g.
  • a first weight 4382 may vary between l-5g
  • a second and third weight 4382 may vary between 5-3 Og.
  • one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 0-1 Og
  • one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 10-20g
  • one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 20-30
  • one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between
  • a first and second weight 4382 may vary between 1-1 Og, and a third and fourth weight 4382, may vary between 5-25g.
  • a first weight 4382 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 4382 each have a mass of 1.5 grams.
  • a first weight 4382 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 4382 each have a mass of 1.5 grams.
  • a first weight 4382 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 4382 each have a mass of 0.75 grams.
  • the first weight 4382 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 , 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the second, third, and fourth weight 4382 can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 4382 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0. l-50g.
  • the weights 4382 may be strategically positioned and coupled to the features 4370 to achieve a desired club head 4310 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias.
  • a heavier weight 4382 is positioned at the feature 4370B, located between the toe or toe end 4318 and the heel or heel end 4322, while lighter weights are positioned on the feature 4370A near the toe or toe end 4318 and the feature 4370C near the heel or heel end 4322.
  • the fastener 4385 can be coupled to the feature 4370 and weight 4382 to secure the weight 4382 within the channel 4313 at the distinct location.
  • the aforementioned weight 4382 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 4334 of the club head 4310.
  • a heavier weight 4382 is positioned on the feature 4370C near the heel or heel end 4322, while lighter weights 4382 are positioned on the feature 4370 A near the toe or toe end 4318 and on the feature 4370B that is located between the toe or toe end 4318C and the heel or heel end 4322.
  • the aforementioned weight 4382 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 4322 of the club head 4310.
  • a heavier weight 4382 is positioned on the feature 4370A near the toe or toe end 4318, while lighter weights 4382 are positioned on the feature 4370C near the heel or heel end 4322 and on the feature 4370B that is located between the toe or toe end 4318 and the heel or heel end 4322.
  • the aforementioned weight 4382 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 4318 of the club head 4310.
  • one or more of the features 4370 are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features.
  • one or more of the features 4370 can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 4370 has its own corresponding weight 4382 or set of weights 4382.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4366 of golf club head 4310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4366 of golf club head 4310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 4310 having the adjustable weighting system 4366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4366 of golf club head 4310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4366 of golf club head 4310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
  • the club head 4310 having the adjustable weighting system 4366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
  • FIGS. 106-108 illustrate a club head 4410 having a club head body 4414.
  • the club head 4410 includes an adjustable weighting system 4466 comprising a cable 4469, and a tensioner4467 that is adjustable by an end user to modify the club head 4410 center of gravity and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias to achieve desired performance characteristics (e.g., forgiveness, spin, trajectory) under various circumstances.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4466 is a low profile system and thereby does not significantly shift or change the club head 4410 MOI when compared to a club head not including the adjustable weighting system 4466. Further, the low profile adjustable weighting system 4466 ensures that shifts in the club head 4410 CG occur mainly in a heel end 4422 to toe end 4418 direction keeping the overall club head 4410 CG in a low and back location.
  • the adjustable weighting system 4466 is positioned on a sole 4430 of the club head 4410.
  • the sole 4430 of the club head 4110 comprises channels 4413.
  • the channels 4413 extend radially from a generally central location of the sole 4430 toward a trailing edge 4472. In other embodiments, the channels 4413 can extend radially from any location on the sole 4430 (e.g., central positioned proximate a toe end 4418, central positioned proximate a heel end 4422, etc.). As illustrated in FIG.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Golf Clubs (AREA)

Abstract

La présente invention concerne, dans certains modes de réalisation, des têtes de club de golf possédant des systèmes de poids réglables pourvus d'une pluralité d'emplacements de fixation distincts aptes à recevoir un ou plusieurs poids. Les têtes de club de golf selon l'invention permettent à l'utilisateur de régler le centre de gravité de la tête de club afin d'ajuster la trajectoire de la balle tout en maintenant un moment d'inertie élevé et une position de centre de gravité arrière bas.
PCT/US2017/034586 2016-05-25 2017-05-25 Tête de club à poids réglable WO2017205699A1 (fr)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
GB1818828.4A GB2565690B (en) 2016-05-25 2017-05-25 Adjustable weight club head
US16/185,923 US10556161B2 (en) 2016-05-25 2018-11-09 Adjustable weight club head
US16/721,630 US10864416B2 (en) 2016-05-25 2019-12-19 Adjustable weight club head
US16/952,403 US11291892B2 (en) 2016-05-25 2020-11-19 Adjustable weight club head
US17/692,497 US11918871B2 (en) 2016-05-25 2022-03-11 Adjustable weight club head

Applications Claiming Priority (20)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201662341542P 2016-05-25 2016-05-25
US62/341,542 2016-05-25
US201662346701P 2016-06-07 2016-06-07
US62/346,701 2016-06-07
US201662348645P 2016-06-10 2016-06-10
US62/348,645 2016-06-10
US201662357907P 2016-07-01 2016-07-01
US62/357,907 2016-07-01
US201662377465P 2016-08-19 2016-08-19
US62/377,465 2016-08-19
US201662425553P 2016-11-22 2016-11-22
US62/425,553 2016-11-22
US201762448864P 2017-01-20 2017-01-20
US62/448,864 2017-01-20
US201762456724P 2017-02-09 2017-02-09
US62/456,724 2017-02-09
US201762472742P 2017-03-17 2017-03-17
US62/472,742 2017-03-17
US201762484256P 2017-04-11 2017-04-11
US62/484,256 2017-04-11

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2018/000181 Continuation-In-Part WO2019035912A1 (fr) 2016-05-25 2018-08-15 Tête de club à poids réglable
US16/185,923 Continuation-In-Part US10556161B2 (en) 2016-05-25 2018-11-09 Adjustable weight club head

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017205699A1 true WO2017205699A1 (fr) 2017-11-30

Family

ID=60411629

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2017/034586 WO2017205699A1 (fr) 2016-05-25 2017-05-25 Tête de club à poids réglable

Country Status (2)

Country Link
GB (10) GB2606323B (fr)
WO (1) WO2017205699A1 (fr)

Cited By (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019035912A1 (fr) * 2017-08-15 2019-02-21 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Tête de club à poids réglable
US10675514B2 (en) 2018-01-19 2020-06-09 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US10765922B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2020-09-08 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US10806977B2 (en) 2018-01-19 2020-10-20 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Golf club heads comprising a thermoplastic composite material
US10828543B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2020-11-10 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US10940373B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2021-03-09 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US10940374B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2021-03-09 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US20210187371A1 (en) * 2018-12-21 2021-06-24 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Golf club with adjustable weighting system
US20220226701A1 (en) * 2021-01-21 2022-07-21 Sumitomo Rubber Industries, Ltd. Golf club
US20230330497A1 (en) * 2022-04-13 2023-10-19 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Golf club heads with adjustable weighting system
GB2618456A (en) * 2019-07-24 2023-11-08 Karsten Mfg Corp Multi-component golf club head
US11819743B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2023-11-21 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US20240017137A1 (en) * 2022-07-12 2024-01-18 Acushnet Company Golf club having an adjustable weight assembly
US11969632B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2024-04-30 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20100304887A1 (en) * 2009-05-28 2010-12-02 Acushnet Company Golf club head having variable center of gravity location
US20110009209A1 (en) * 2007-02-12 2011-01-13 Mizuno Usa Golf club head and golf clubs
US20110045921A1 (en) * 2007-11-09 2011-02-24 Callaway Golf Company Golf club head with adjustable weighting, customizable face-angle, and variable bulge and roll face
US20110053705A1 (en) * 2009-08-26 2011-03-03 Nike, Inc Golf Clubs and Golf Club Heads Having a Movable Weight
US20150306473A1 (en) * 2014-04-25 2015-10-29 Cobra Golf Incorporated Golf club with adjustable weight assembly
US20160051869A1 (en) * 2012-11-16 2016-02-25 Callaway Golf Company Golf club head with adjustable center of gravity
US20160074720A1 (en) * 2014-09-16 2016-03-17 Dunlop Sports Company Limited Golf club head with interior weight adjustable in multiple directions

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2327889B (en) * 1997-08-09 1999-10-06 Wang Samw Hong Jen Golf club head
US6607452B2 (en) * 1997-10-23 2003-08-19 Callaway Golf Company High moment of inertia composite golf club head
US20100331102A1 (en) * 2009-06-24 2010-12-30 Golden Charles E Golf club head with non-threaded internal cavity chamber
US8414422B2 (en) * 2009-12-16 2013-04-09 Callaway Golf Company External weight for golf club head
US9259625B2 (en) * 2009-12-23 2016-02-16 Taylor Made Golf Company, Inc. Golf club head
US9220953B2 (en) * 2010-12-28 2015-12-29 Taylor Made Golf Company, Inc. Fairway wood center of gravity projection

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110009209A1 (en) * 2007-02-12 2011-01-13 Mizuno Usa Golf club head and golf clubs
US20110045921A1 (en) * 2007-11-09 2011-02-24 Callaway Golf Company Golf club head with adjustable weighting, customizable face-angle, and variable bulge and roll face
US20100304887A1 (en) * 2009-05-28 2010-12-02 Acushnet Company Golf club head having variable center of gravity location
US20110053705A1 (en) * 2009-08-26 2011-03-03 Nike, Inc Golf Clubs and Golf Club Heads Having a Movable Weight
US20160051869A1 (en) * 2012-11-16 2016-02-25 Callaway Golf Company Golf club head with adjustable center of gravity
US20150306473A1 (en) * 2014-04-25 2015-10-29 Cobra Golf Incorporated Golf club with adjustable weight assembly
US20160074720A1 (en) * 2014-09-16 2016-03-17 Dunlop Sports Company Limited Golf club head with interior weight adjustable in multiple directions

Cited By (26)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11660511B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2023-05-30 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US10828543B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2020-11-10 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US11819743B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2023-11-21 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US11969632B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2024-04-30 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US11278775B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2022-03-22 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US10940373B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2021-03-09 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US10940374B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2021-03-09 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US11638859B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2023-05-02 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US11534666B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2022-12-27 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US10765922B2 (en) 2016-05-27 2020-09-08 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
EP3668617A4 (fr) * 2017-08-15 2021-05-12 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Tête de club à poids réglable
WO2019035912A1 (fr) * 2017-08-15 2019-02-21 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Tête de club à poids réglable
EP4218965A1 (fr) * 2017-08-15 2023-08-02 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Tête de club à poids réglable
US11110325B2 (en) 2018-01-19 2021-09-07 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US10675514B2 (en) 2018-01-19 2020-06-09 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Mixed material golf club head
US10806977B2 (en) 2018-01-19 2020-10-20 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Golf club heads comprising a thermoplastic composite material
US11896879B2 (en) 2018-01-19 2024-02-13 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Golf club heads comprising a thermoplastic composite material
US11235210B2 (en) 2018-01-19 2022-02-01 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Golf club heads comprising a thermoplastic composite material
US20210187371A1 (en) * 2018-12-21 2021-06-24 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Golf club with adjustable weighting system
GB2618456B (en) * 2019-07-24 2024-04-03 Karsten Mfg Corp Multi-component golf club head
GB2618456A (en) * 2019-07-24 2023-11-08 Karsten Mfg Corp Multi-component golf club head
US20220226701A1 (en) * 2021-01-21 2022-07-21 Sumitomo Rubber Industries, Ltd. Golf club
US11666807B2 (en) * 2021-01-21 2023-06-06 Sumitomo Rubber Industries, Ltd. Golf club
US20230330497A1 (en) * 2022-04-13 2023-10-19 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Golf club heads with adjustable weighting system
US20240017137A1 (en) * 2022-07-12 2024-01-18 Acushnet Company Golf club having an adjustable weight assembly
US11925841B2 (en) * 2022-07-12 2024-03-12 Acushnet Company Golf club having an adjustable weight assembly

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
GB2610519B (en) 2023-07-12
GB2610517A (en) 2023-03-08
GB2610517B (en) 2023-05-24
GB2608087A (en) 2022-12-21
GB202211047D0 (en) 2022-09-14
GB2603075A (en) 2022-07-27
GB2603075B (en) 2022-11-02
GB2565690A (en) 2019-02-20
GB2604305B (en) 2022-12-28
GB2608085B (en) 2023-03-22
GB2565690B (en) 2022-02-02
GB2600264B (en) 2022-12-28
GB2608085A (en) 2022-12-21
GB2600264A (en) 2022-04-27
GB2606323B (en) 2023-02-15
GB201818828D0 (en) 2019-01-02
GB202204354D0 (en) 2022-05-11
GB2608087B (en) 2023-03-29
GB202217607D0 (en) 2023-01-11
GB202214194D0 (en) 2022-11-09
GB2610519A (en) 2023-03-08
GB202207970D0 (en) 2022-07-13
GB2608086B (en) 2023-05-10
GB202117911D0 (en) 2022-01-26
GB2608086A (en) 2022-12-21
GB202214190D0 (en) 2022-11-09
GB202214197D0 (en) 2022-11-09
GB2604305A (en) 2022-08-31
GB2606323A (en) 2022-11-02
GB202217813D0 (en) 2023-01-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11291892B2 (en) Adjustable weight club head
WO2017205699A1 (fr) Tête de club à poids réglable
EP3668617B1 (fr) Tête de club à poids réglable
US11602678B2 (en) Golf club head having an adjustable weighting system
US9072949B2 (en) Golf clubs and golf club heads having interchangeable rear body members
US11167184B2 (en) Golf clubs and golf club heads having interchangeable rear body members
JP2008194454A (ja) ゴルフクラブヘッド
KR102055808B1 (ko) 길이 조절 가능한 골프 클럽 및 이러한 길이 조절 가능한 골프 클럽을 제조하기 위한 방법

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 201818828

Country of ref document: GB

Kind code of ref document: A

Free format text: PCT FILING DATE = 20170525

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17803636

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17803636

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1